Menu

Romans 2:15 — Word Study

Depth

N1904οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν συμμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων καὶ ἀπολογουμένων,

BSAwhohostis, hētis showendeiknumi [demonstrate, prove] theho workergon [task, occupation] of theho lawnomos [God's commandments, divine principles] writtengraptos [inscribed, engraved] inen theho heartskardia [the seat of thoughts, feelings, and emotions] when theyautos are bearing witnesssummartureō [testifying, affirming] to themautos theirho consciencesuneidēsis [moral awareness, inner voice] andkai betweenmetaxu one anotherallēlōn theho thoughtslogismos [reasoning, mental processes] accusingkatēgoreō [condemning, blaming] orē alsokai presenting a defenseapologeomai [justifying, excusing, themselves, one another]

Word
Listen & take awayRomans 2
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 15 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (apologeomai) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Romans 2:15quick helps
In a sentencePaul explains that Gentiles show the law's work is inscribed in their hearts, with their consciences and thoughts actively engaged.
Who is speakingThe Apostle Paul, addressing the moral condition of Gentiles.
Where we areIn a discussion about the law and its implications for both Jews and Gentiles.
The hard wordἔργον
Take awayThe law is not just external; it is an internal guide for all people.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectὅστις verbἐνδείκνυμι The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

1 of 24 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Romans 2:15

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Righteousness of Godgenerated

14Indeed, when Gentiles, who do not have the law, do by nature what the law requires, they are a law to themselves, even though they do not have the law.
15So they show that the work of the law is written on their hearts, their consciences also bearing witness, and their thoughts either accusing or defending them
16on the day when God will judge men’s secrets through Christ Jesus, as proclaimed by my gospel.
17Now you, if you call yourself a Jew; if you rely on the law and boast in God;

Romans 2:15 discusses how Gentiles, who do not possess the written law, still demonstrate an understanding of God's moral standards through their actions. This internal moral compass shows that God's law is not solely external but has been inscribed in their hearts. Paul emphasizes that their consciences bear witness to their moral decisions, which can either accuse or defend them, highlighting the universal nature of God's law.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Romans 1:18–19The wrath of God is being revealed from heaven against all the godlessness and wickedness of men who suppress the truth by their wickedness.
2Romans 9:1I speak the truth in Christ; I am not lying, as confirmed by my conscience in the Holy Spirit.
3John 8:9When they heard this, they began to go away one by one, beginning with the older ones, until only Jesus was left, with the woman standing there.
4Acts 23:1Paul looked directly at the Sanhedrin and said, “Brothers, I have conducted myself before God in all good conscience to this day.”
5Acts 24:16In this hope, I strive always to maintain a clear conscience before God and man.

The Key Word ἔργον, ergongenerated

The Greek word ἔργον (i.e., *ergon*) means 'work' or 'deed.' It refers to actions or tasks that carry moral weight, such as the duties prescribed by the law. In this verse, it signifies the work of the law that is evident in the lives of individuals.

The noun is in the accusative singular, indicating that it is the direct object of the verb. This structure emphasizes the specific task or work that the law represents in the hearts of people.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The primary translation for this study is the Berean Standard Bible, which uses work for ἔργον. Other translations like the KJV and ASV also use work, maintaining consistency in this key term.

Where they differ is in the rendering of συμμαρτυρούσης — the BSB uses bearing witness, while the WEB opts for testifying. Additionally, the BSB uses conscience for συνειδήσεως, while some versions like the BSB use consciences.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is ἐνδείκνυνται, they show, which governs the entire sentence. It is followed by a noun phrase that identifies the object, τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, the work of the law, and several phrases that elaborate on how this work is manifested.

The structure includes a participial phrase συμμαρτυρούσης that describes the conscience, and additional clauses that detail the thoughts of individuals, indicating a complex interplay between their internal moral awareness and their actions.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἔργον appears in the Septuagint, commonly translating the Hebrew words for מַעֲשֶׂה (deed) and מְלָאכָה (occupation). This connection emphasizes the continuity of moral and ethical work from the Old Testament into the New Testament context.

The concept of the law being written on hearts resonates with the prophetic literature, particularly in ירמיהו (Jeremiah), which speaks of a new covenant where God's law is internalized.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Romans 2:15 explains that even those who do not have the written law still demonstrate an understanding of God's commands through their actions. Their consciences help them recognize right from wrong, and their thoughts either accuse or defend them based on their deeds.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean that the law is written on their hearts?

It means that God's moral standards are innately understood by all people, not just those who have the written law.

How do consciences bear witness?

Consciences bear witness by providing an internal sense of right and wrong, guiding individuals in their moral decisions.

What is the significance of thoughts accusing or defending?

This signifies the internal struggle individuals face regarding their actions, where their thoughts reflect their moral judgments.

Why is this passage important for understanding Gentiles?

This passage shows that Gentiles are not exempt from moral accountability, as they too possess an understanding of God's law through their conscience.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How do I see God's moral law reflected in my own conscience?
  2. What actions in my life demonstrate an understanding of right and wrong?
  3. In what ways do I find my thoughts both accusing and defending me?
  4. How can I better align my actions with the moral truths inscribed on my heart?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church Fathers comment on Romans 2:15, discussing the implications of the law written in hearts and the role of conscience in moral judgment.

Origen of AlexandriaCOMMENTARY ON THE EPISTLE TO THE ROMANS c. 185–253
“Written on their hearts” should not be taken too literally. What Paul calls the heart is the rational faculty of the soul.It is also necessary to discuss what Paul means by the word conscience.
Early Church Fathers on Romans 2 →
John ChrysostomHomily on Romans 5 c. 347–407
"Which show the work of the Law written in their hearts, their conscience also bearing witness, and their thoughts the meanwhile accusing or else excusing one another." See how he again puts that day before them,
Early Church Fathers on Romans 2 →
Augustine of HippoAUGUSTINE ON Romans 10 354–430
Compare this with 1 John [3:20]: “Dearly beloved, if our own hearts condemn us, God is greater than our conscience.”
Early Church Fathers on Romans 2 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Romans 2:15 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Which show the work of the law written in their hearts,.... Though the Gentiles had not the law in form, written on tables, or in a book, yet they had "the work", the matter, the sum and substance of

Read John Gill on Romans 2 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Which shew the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience also bearing witness, and their thoughts the mean while accusing or else excusing one another;) Which show the work of the law

Read Robert Jamieson on Romans 2 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

By the work of the law, either understand the sum of the law, which is, To love God above all, and our neighbour as ourselves; or the office of the law, which consists in directing what to do, and what to leave undone; or the external actions which the law prescribes. Written in their hearts; this seems to be a covenant promise and privilege, ; how then is it predicated of the Gentiles? Answer. Jereramiah speaks there of a special and supernatural inscription or writing in the heart by grace; and the apostle here, of that which is common and natural. Their thoughts the mean while accusing or else excusing one another; interchangeably, now one way, anon another. Not as though the thoughts…

Read Matthew Poole on Romans 2 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

15 Which shew the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience also bearing witness, and their thoughts the mean while accusing or else excusing one another;) Ver. 15. Their thoughts meanwhile] Or, between whiles: or in every interim of this life, μεταξυ. Other faculties may rest; an obscene dream by night shall not escape conscience’ s record; it is index, iudex, vindex, informer, judge and defender, God’ s spy and man’ s overseer; and it is better to have it sore than seared.

Read John Trapp on Romans 2 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(15) Which.—Rather, Inasmuch as they.The work of the law.—The practical effect or realisation of the law—written in their hearts as the original Law was written upon the tables of stone, (Comp. Jeremiah 31:33; 2 Corinthians 3:3.) Also bearing witness.—Or, witnessing with them, as margin. There is a double witness; their actions speak for them externally, and conscience speaks for them internally. The mean while.—Rather, literally, as margin, between themselves—i.e., with mutual interchange, the thoughts of the heart or different motions of conscience sometimes taking the part of advocate, sometimes of accuser. This seems, on the whole, the best way of taking these two words, though some…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Romans 2 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 15. Which show the work of the law] In acting according to justice, mercy, temperance, and truth, they show that the great object of the law, which was to bring men from injustice, cruelty, intemperance, and falsity, is accomplished so far in them: their conscience also bearing witness - that faculty of the soul, where that Divine light dwells and works, shows them that they are right; and thus they have a comfortable testimony in their own souls of their own integrity: their thoughts, the mean while, accusing, or else excusing one another; or rather, their reasonings between one another accusing or answering for themselves. As if the apostle had said: - And this point, that they have…

Read AdamClarke on Romans 2 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

15. which shew] The relative pronoun is the same as in Romans 1:25, where see note. It marks a condition: “they are a law to themselves, inasmuch as, &c.”shew the work of the law written in their hearts] “The work of the law” has been explained as if collective for “works;” but this is ill-supported by real parallels. It is better to explain it as “what the law does,” than as “what is done for the law’s sake;” and thus it means the teaching of the Difference of right and wrong (see Romans 3:20). This “work,” done in an intense degree by the law, is done in a lower degree by conscience alone; but the work is the same in kind. The sense of wrong and right, which it is the law’s work to…

Read Cambridge on Romans 2 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Which show - Who thus evince or show. The work of the law - The design, purpose, or object which is contemplated by the revealed Law; that is, to make known to man his duty, and to enforce the obligation to perform it.

Read Albert Barnes on Romans 2 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

So they show that the work of the law is written on their hearts, their consciences also bearing witness, and their thoughts either accusing or defending them

WEBWorld English Bible2000

in that they show the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience testifying with them, and their thoughts among themselves accusing or else excusing them)

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

So they show that the work of the law is written on their hearts, their consciences also bearing witness, and their thoughts either accusing or defending them

NETBNew English Translation2006

They show that the work of the law is written in their hearts, as their conscience bears witness and their conflicting thoughts accuse or else defend them,

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Which shew the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience also bearing witness, and their thoughts the mean while accusing or else excusing one another;)

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

in that they show the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience bearing witness therewith, and their thoughts one with another accusing or else excusing them);

RVARevised Version, American1894

in that they shew the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience bearing witness therewith, and their thoughts one with another accusing or else excusing them;

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Who show the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience also bearing testimony, and their thoughts the mean while accusing, or else excusing one another)

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Which shew the effect of the Lawe written in their hearts, their conscience also bearing witnes, and their thoughts accusing one another, or excusing,)

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

who shew the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience also bearing witness, and their thoughts accusing or else excusing themselves between themselves;)

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

who do shew the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience also witnessing with them, and between one another the thoughts accusing or else defending,

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

who show the work of the Law written in their hearts, their conscience also witnessing with them, and between one another the thoughts accusing or else defending,

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

By this they show that the actions required by the law are written in their hearts. Their conscience also bears witness to them, and their own thoughts either accuse or defend them to themselves

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

Who shew the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience bearing witness to them, and their thoughts between themselves accusing, or also defending one another,

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

In this way they show how the law works that's written in their minds. As they think about what they're doing, their conscience either accuses them for doing wrong or defends them for doing what is good and right.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Because the work of the law is seen in their hearts, their sense of right and wrong giving witness to it, while their minds are at one time judging them and at another giving them approval;

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἔργονergon work G2041 2 different renderings
workASV BBE BSB DBY DRA KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA WEB YLT
worksFBV
συμμαρτυρούσηςsummartureō are bearing witness G4828 2 different renderings
bearing witnessASV BSB DBY DRA KJV MSB RVA
testifyingWEB
συνειδήσεωςsuneidēsis conscience G4893 2 different renderings
conscienceASV DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
consciencesBSB MSB
κατηγορούντωνkatēgoreō accusing G2723 2 different renderings
accusingASV BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NWB RVA WEB YLT
accuseNETB ULB
ἀπολογουμένων,apologeomai presenting a defense G626 3 different renderings
one anotherDRA GNV KJV LSV NWB YLT
themselvesDBY ULB WEB
excusingASV RVA

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clausesubjectοἵτινεςwhoverbἐνδείκνυνταιshownoun phrase · objectτὸthenoun phraseἔργονworknoun phraseτοῦof theνόμουlawadjective phrase · second objectγραπτὸνwrittenprepositional phraseἐνinnoun phraseταῖςthenoun phraseκαρδίαιςheartsαὐτῶνof themclause · adverbialclauseverbσυνμαρτυρούσηςbearing witnessnoun phrase · subjectαὐτῶνtheirnoun phraseτῆς-συνειδήσεωςconscienceκαὶandclauseclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialμεταξὺbetweenἀλλήλωνone anothernoun phrase · subjectτῶνtheλογισμῶνthoughtsverbκατηγορούντωνaccusingorclauseadverbialκαὶalsoverbἀπολογουμένωνdefending [them]noun phrase · adverbialἡμέρᾳdayclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνon[that]verbκρίνειwill judgenoun phrase · subject-ΘεὸςGodnoun phrase · objectτὰthenoun phraseκρυπτὰsecretsnoun phraseτῶν-ἀνθρώπωνof menprepositional phrase · adverbialκατὰaccording tonoun phraseτὸthenoun phraseεὐαγγέλιόνgospelμουof meprepositional phrase · adverbialδιὰbynoun phraseΧριστοῦChristἸησοῦJesus

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

qui ostendunt opus legis scriptum in cordibus suis, testimonium reddente illis conscientia ipsorum, et inter se invicem cogitationibus accusantibus, aut etiam defendentibus,

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܗܢܘܢ ܡܚܘܝܢ ܥܒܕܗ ܕܢܡܘܣܐ ܟܕ ܟܬܝܒ ܥܠ ܠܒܗܘܢ ܘܡܣܗܕܐ ܥܠܝܗܘܢ ܬܐܪܬܗܘܢ ܟܕ ܡܚܫܒܬܗܘܢ ܡܟܘܢܢ ܐܘ ܢܦܩܢ ܪܘܚܐ ܠܚܕܕܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν συμμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων καὶ ἀπολογουμένων,

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν συμμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων καὶ ἀπολογουμένων,

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν συμμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων καὶ ἀπολογουμένων,

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν συμμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων καὶ ἀπολογουμένων,

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν συμμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων καὶ ἀπολογουμένων,

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν συμμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων καὶ ἀπολογουμένων,

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν συμμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων καὶ ἀπολογουμένων,

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν συμμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων καὶ ἀπολογουμένων,

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Romans 2:15ὅστιςwhowhoὅστιςἐνδείκνυμιshowshowἐνδείκνυμιthetheἔργονworkworkἔργονof theof theνόμοςlawlawνόμοςγραπτόςwrittenwrittenγραπτόςἐνininἐνthetheκαρδίαheartsheartsκαρδίααὐτόςwhen theywhen theyαὐτόςσυμμαρτυρέωare bearingare bearing witσυμμαρτυρέωαὐτόςto themto themαὐτόςtheirtheirσυνείδησιςconscienceconscienceσυνείδησιςκαίandandκαίμεταξύbetweenbetweenμεταξύἀλλήλωνone anotherone anotherἀλλήλωνthetheλογισμόςthoughtsthoughtsλογισμόςκατηγορέωaccusingaccusingκατηγορέωororκαίalsoalsoκαίἀπολογέομαιpresenting presenting a deἀπολογέομαιὅςRel.pr. whRel.pr. who, whὅςἐνPrep. in, Prep. in, on, aἐνγράφωv. I writev. I writeγράφωἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦσύνPrep. withPrep. withσύνμετάPrep. withPrep. with, aftμετάἄλλοςAdj other,Adj other, anotἄλλοςλογίζομαιv. I reckov. I reckon, coλογίζομαικατήγοροςn.m. a pron.m. a prosecutκατήγοροςεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκἤδηAdv now, aAdv now, alreadἤδηἤπερDisj.prt. Disj.prt. thanἤπερἀπόPrep. fromPrep. from, awaἀπόλόγοςn.m. a worn.m. a word, spλόγοςκαθαρόςAdj clean,Adj clean, pureκαθαρόςἐπερωτάωv. I interv. I interrogatἐπερωτάω
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Romans 2:15

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
οἵτινεςhostis, hētis who G3748 Relative pronoun · nominative · plural · masculine
140× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'who' or 'which' and is used to ask about someone or something's identity, like in Matthew 5:39. It's often used to make general statements.
Tyndale gloss
who/which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅστις (i.e., *hostis*) is a relative pronoun meaning 'whoever' or 'whosoever.' It is used in the New Testament primarily in general statements and relative sentences, often indicating an indefinite person or thing. The word is built from the components for 'who' and 'any.' Notably, there is some distinction in usage between ὅστις and its simpler form ὅς, particularly in the writings of Paul compared to Luke.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι (also written ὅ, τι and ὅτι; v. LS, s.v.; WH, § 411; Tdf., Pr., 111), in NT scarcely ever except in nom. (M, Pr., 91), the only instance of the oblique cases being found in ἕως ὅτου (v.s. ἕως), relative of indef. reference (related to simple ὅς as Lat. quisquis to qui),

whoever, anyone who;

of an indef. person or thing: in general statements, Mt 5:39, 41 13:12, and freq., Lk 14:27, Ga 5:4, al.; in relative sentences, Mt 7:26, Lk 15:7, Phl 3:7, al.; πᾶς ὅ., c. indic., Mt 7:24 10:32; ὅ ἄν (ἐάν), c. subjc., Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ,τι (separated by a hypodiastole [comma], to distinguish it from ὅτε; but L T Tr write 6 τι, without a hypodiastole [ef. Td. Proleg. p. 111], leaving a little space between 6 and τι; [WH ὅτι]; cf. W. 46 (45 sq.); [Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 118 sq.; WH. Intr. § 4117), gen. οὕτινος (but of the oblique cases only the acc. neut. ὅ,τι and the gen. ὅτου, in the phrase ἕως ὅτου, are found in the N. T.), [fr. Hom. down], comp. of és and tis, hence prop. any one who; i.e. 1. whoever, every one who: ὅστις simply, in the sing. chiefly at the beginning of a sentence in general propositions, esp. in Matt. ; w. an indic. pres., Mt. xiii. 12 (twice); Mk. viii. 34 (where L Tr WH εἴ τις); Lk. xiv. 27; neut. Mt. xviii. 28 Rec.; w. a fut., Mt. v. 39 [RG Trmrg.], 41; xxiii. 12, ete.; Jas. ii. 10 RG; plur. οἵτινες, whosoever (all those who): w. indic. pres., Mk. iv. 20; Lk. viii. 15; Gal.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὅστις. The classical distinction between ὅστις and ὅς which in the NT is maintained on the whole in Paul, but not in Luke (nor in the LXX, Thackeray ΟἿ". i. p. 192), has worn very thin in the papyri. Thus with Mt 2753 a/. we may compare i P Oxy I. 1104 (an invitation to dinner—ii/a.D.) αὔριον, ἥτις

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅστις (hostis, hētis) — who/which.

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι

(sometimes written ὅ, τι to distinct it from ὅτι, that): [Refs 8th c.BC+] has also the masculine collateral form ὅτις [Refs 8th c.BC+] and Ionic dialect and [Refs 4th c.AD+] and the neuter ὅττι [Refs 8th c.BC+]—In some forms only the second part is inflected, i.e. genitive ὅτου [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect ὅττεο [Refs 8th c.BC+][same place], contraction ὅττευ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; perhaps also in Ionic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ὅτεῳ [Refs 8th c.BC+], and as disyllable, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect accusative ὅτινα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Delph. dative ὅτινι [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; neuter ὅτινα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect ὅτων [Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect ὅτοισι [Refs 8th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect ὄττινας [Refs 7th c.BC+]: of the forms with double inflexion [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ᾧτινι first in [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅστις

hostis

hetis hay'-tis, and the neuter

ho,ti hot'-ee

from 3739 and 5100; which some, i.e. any that; also (definite) which

same:--X and (they), (such) as, (they) that, in that they,

what(-soever), whereas ye, (they) which, who(-soever). Compare 3754.

see GREEK for 3739

see GREEK for 5100

see GREEK for 3754

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅτι

Rel.pr.

whosoever, whichsoever, whatsoever

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅστις hostis 144x

whoever, whatever; whosoever, whatsoever, Mt. 5:39, 41; 13:12; 18:4; its use in place of the simple relative is also required in various cases, which may be learned from the grammars; ἕως ὅτου, i.e. χρόνου, until, Lk. 13:8; while, Mt. 5:25

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὅστις any one who, anything which, i. e. whosoever, whichsoever, differing from ὅς, as Lat. quisquis, from qui, Hom., etc.; ὅντινα κιχείη whomsoever he caught, Il.; ὅτις κ ἐπίορκον ὀμόσσῃ whoso forswears himself, id. Il., etc.: —ἔστιν ὅστις, Lat. est qui, often with a negat., οὐκ ἔστιν ὅτῳ μείζονα μοῖραν νείμαιμ᾽ there is no one to whom I would give more, Aesch., etc.: —οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐ everything, Hdt.

hardly different from ὅς, who, βωμόν, ὅστις νῦν ἔξω τῆς πόλεώς ἐστι the altar, which . . , Thuc.

in indirect questions, ξεῖνος ὅδ᾽, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅστις Od.:—in dialogue, when the person questioned repeats the question asked by τίς, as οὗτος τί ποιεῖς; Answ. ὅ τι ποιῶ; [you ask] what I'm doing?…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-NPM — Relative pronoun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-NPM Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
54%who
who54% · 79×which26% · 38×whoever9% · 13×when2% · 3×other renderings4% · 6×other renderings4% · 6×

145 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 140 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
γυνήa woman, wife, my la
Article theὁράωI see, look uponκαίand, even, also,
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςὕψιστοςhighest, most hiἅγιοςset apart, holy,
καίand, even, also, nam
ταπεινόωI humble, humiliὀφθαλμόςthe eyeθεόςGod, a god
ἐγώ
λόγοςa word, speech, θεόςGod, a godὑπαντάωI meet
οἰκοδεσπότηςa head of a househol
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thεἰμίI am, exist
ὅστιςwho140×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
μετάπᾶςall, the whole, ἐν
οὐNeg
μήNegἰσχύωI am strong, ablἀφαιρέωI take away, smi
ἐν
Article theκαρδίαthe heart, innerνόμοςa law, the Mosai
σύ
ῥαπίζωI slap, strikeἀγγαρεύωI impress, sendὡςas, like as, how
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjοὐNegὑψόωI lift up, exalt

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅστις · 140× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke Hebrews Romans Revelation Galatians Ephesians Mark Philippians 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 47c. AD 40

εἰ γοῦν οἱ ἀπὸ μονάδος ἄχρι τετράδος ἑξῆς συντεθεῖεν ἀριθμοί, δεκάδα γεννήσουσιν, ἥτις ὅρος τῆς ἀπειρίας τῶν ἀριθμῶν ἐστι, περὶ ὃν ὡς καμπτῆρα εἱλοῦνται καὶ ἀνακάμπτουσι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.3c. AD 75–95

εἰσὶ δʼ οἵτινες ἐβιάσθησαν ὑπʼ αὐτῆς τῆς τῶν πραγμάτων ἀνάγκης οἷς πραττομένοις παρέτυχον ταῦτα γραφῇ δηλούσῃ περιλαβεῖν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 10.3c. AD 100

τὸ οὖν χοιρίον πρὸς τοῦτο εἶπεν: οὐ κολληθήσῃ φησίν, ἀνθρώποις τοιούτοις, οἵτινές εἰσιν ὅμοιοι χοίρων: τουτέστιν ὅταν σπαταλῶσιν, ἐπιλανθάνονται τοῦ κυρίου, ὅταν δὲ ὑστεροῦνται, ἐπιγινώσκουσιν τὸν κύριον, ὡς καὶ ὁ χοῖρος ὅταν τρώγει τὸν κύριον οὐκ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.Fam.Tebt. 9Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 107

τοὺς τόκους ἃ ὤφειλεν ἡ Θαῆσις τῇ τῶν δύο Ἡρακλείδου καὶ Ἀπίας ἀδελφῆι Ἡρωδιαίνῃ ἥτις ἀπῄτησεν κατὰ ἀσφάλειαν τετελειωμένην διὰ τοῦ ἐν Θεογονίδι γραφείου τῶι ὀγδόωι ἔτει Τραιανοῦ Καίσαρος

P.Fam.Tebt. 13ArsinoitesAD 113–AD 114

ἐτῶν λ οὐλὴ γόνατι ἀριστερῷ … ονους με … συνῆρσθαι τὴν προς ἀλλήλους συνβίωσιν ἥτις αὐτοῖς συνειστήκει ἀπὸ συνγραφῆς ὁμολογίας τετελειωμένης διὰ τοῦ ἐν Τεπτύνει γραφείου ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν

P.Athen.. 35Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 154

Ἁδριανοῦ Ἀντωνίνου Σεβαστοῦ Εὐσεβοῦς τύχην ἐργάσεσθαι ἐν τῷ προκιμένῳ δρυμῷ ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπογεγραμμένης ἡμέρας, ἥτις ἐστὶν ἡ πέμπτη τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνὸς Φαρμοῦθι καὶ παραστήσειν τὸν μὲν Ζεναμοῦνιν τὰ ἑαυτοῦ

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
ἐνδείκνυνταιendeiknumi show G1731 Verb · present · middle · indicative · third person · plural
11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To show or indicate something, as in Romans 2:15 and 9:22. It means to point out or prove a fact or situation. This word is about making something clear or visible.
Amplified meaning
demonstrate, prove
Tyndale gloss
to show
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐνδείκνυμι (i.e., *endeiknumi*) combines the prefix ἐν (in) with the root δείκνυμι (to show). It generally means to indicate or demonstrate something, either by words or actions. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like Romans 2:15 and Hebrews 6:10, where it conveys the idea of proving or manifesting. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν-δείκνυμι

[in LXX for לָכַד, גָּמַל, רָאָה hi. ;]

to mark, point out. Mid„

to show forth, prove: c. acc rei, Ro 2:15 9:22, Eph 2:7, Tit 2:10 3:2, He 6:11; seq. ἐν, c. dat. pers., Ro 9:17 (LXX), I Ti 1:16; seq. εἰς, He 6:10 (c. cogn. acc), II Co 8:24.

to manifest (by act): c. acc rei et dat. pers., II Ti 4:14 (cf. Ge 50:15

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν-δείκνυμι : fo point out, (Lat. indicare; Germ. anzeigen), fr. Pind. down; in mid. first in Hom.; in the N. T. only in Mid. : [pres. évdeixvupac]; 1 aor. ἐνεδειξάμην ; prop. to show one’s self in something, show something in one’s self (ef. B. 192 (166) ]; 1. to show, demonstrate, prove, whether by arguments or by acts: ri, Ro. ix. 22 (joined with γνωρίσαι) ; Eph. ii. 7; Tit. ii. 10; iii. 2; Heb. vi. 11; with two acc., the one of the object, the other of the predicate, Ro. ii. 15; ri ἔν τινι, dat. of the pers., Ro. ix. 17 (fr. Ex. ix. 16 [ef. W. 254 (238)]); 1 Tim.i. 16; ri εἰς τὸ ὄνομά Twos, Heb. vi. 10; τὴν ἔνδειξιν ἐνδείκνυσθαι (as in Plat. legg. 12 p. 966 b.; cf. W. 295 (211)); εἴς τινα, 2 Co. viii. 24. 2. to manifest, display, put forth: τινὶ (dat. of pers.) κακά, 2 Tim. iv. 14; Gen. ]. 15…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐνδείκνυμι. P Magd 3109 (B.c. 221) ἐὰν ἐνδειξώμεθα τὰ διὰ τῆς ἐντεύξεως ὄντα ἀληθῆ, ““1Γ we prove that what we set forth in the petition is true,” 24. 288 (B.c. 217) ἐὰν ἐνδείξωμαι αὐτοὺς κατακεκλυκότας μου τὸν σπόρον, ‘if I prove that they have flooded my sown field.’’ With the construction of ἐ. in 2 Tim 44 πολλά μοι kaka ἐνεδείξατο (cf. Gen 5015; 17) cf. P Oxy III. 4945 (a.p. 156) εὐνοούσῃ μοι kal πᾶσαν πίστιν μοι ἐνδεικνυμένῃ (a passage which also helps to confirm the meaning of ‘‘ faithfulness” for πίστις in such passages as Mt 2375, Gal 52): see also Sy/7 2117 (11.8.6. Ὁ) διατε[λ]εῖ εἰς τὸν δῆμον τὸν “HpvOpalwy [π]ᾶσαν προθυμίαν ἐνδεικνύμενο[ς (cf. Heb 611), and P Oxy IV. 705°? (A.D. 2οο-2). For the act., which is not found in the NT, see P Grenf IT. 708 (A.D. 269) εὐνοίας ἕνεκεν [κ]αὶ ἧς ἐνέ[δειξας eis ἐμ[έ. The subst. ἐνδείκτης = ‘‘ informer,’’ ‘‘ complainant,’’ occurs P Par 45%…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐνδείκνυμι (endeiknumi) — to show.

ἐνδείκ-νῡμι

or ἐνδεικνύω, future -δείξω, mark, point out, τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; indicate, τοὺς καιρούς [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: with participle, show that a thing is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. law-term, inform against, τινά [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— middle, [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—frequently in passive, κακοῦργος ἐνδεδειγμένος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐνδειχθέντα δικάζειν ὀφείλοντα τῷ δημοσίῳ [Refs 4th c.BC+]

3. exhibit, display, ὑπερήφανον αἰχμάν [Refs 4th c.BC+]

4. middle, declare the possession of goods to fiscal authorities, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

II. middle, show forth oneself or what is one's own, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+] I will declare myself to Achilles, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐνδείκνυμι

endeiknumi

from 1722 and 1166; to indicate (by word or act):--do, show (forth).

see GREEK for 1722

see GREEK for 1166

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐνδείκνυμι

v.

I show forth

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐνδείκνυμι endeiknymi 11x

to manifest, display, Rom. 9:17, 22; Heb. 6:10; to give outward proof of, Rom. 2:15; to display a certain bearing towards a person; hence, to perpetrate openly, 2 Tim. 4:14*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐνδείκνυμι or -ύω fut. -δείξω, to mark, point out, Lat. indicare, Soph., etc.

as attic law-term, to inform against one, Plat.; so in Mid., Plut.:—in Pass., ἐνδεδειγμένος Plat.; ἐνδειχθέντα δεκάζειν being informed against for bribing, Dem.

Mid. to shew forth oneself or what is one's own, Πηλείδῃ ἐνδείξομαι I will declare myself to Achilles, Il.; ἐνδείκνυσθαι τὴν γνώμην Hdt.

with a part. to shew, give proof of doing, Eur., etc.

c. acc. rei, to display, exhibit, Lat. prae se ferre, Aesch., Thuc.

ἐνδείκνυσθαί τινι to display oneself to one, make a set at him, court him, Dem., Aeschin.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PMI-3P — Verb · present · middle · indicative · third person · plural
present middle indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PMI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Middle Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sho.

See SHEW.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
27%show
show27% · 3×showing27% · 3×i may show9% · 1×he may show9% · 1×may display9% · 1×did9% · 1×you have shown9% · 1×

11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
εἰςArticle the
ὅστις
ὅπωςhow, in order that,
σύ
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
ἵναin order that, so th
ἐνδείκνυμιshow11×
what comes after →
Article the
ἔργονwork, labor, actὀργήanger, wrath, pa
ἐν
σύArticle the
εἰς
πρόσωπονthe face, counteArticle the
ἸησοῦςJesus
Χριστόςanointed, the Me
ἀποδίδωμιI give back, return,
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐνδείκνυμι · 11× in the New Testament
Romans Hebrews Titus 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians 2 Timothy Ephesians
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.34c. AD 40

ἐᾷ μὲν γὰρ τὸν ὀλοθρεύοντα — ὄλεθρος δὲ ψυχῆς ἐστιν ἡ τροπή — εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ψυχήν, ἵνα τὸ ἴδιον ἐνδείξηται τοῦ γενητοῦ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.300c. AD 75–95

ὅτι βασιλεὺς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ γενόμενος οὐκ ἠμείψατο τὴν εὐεργεσίαν τῷ δικαίως προστῆναι τοῦ πλήθους καὶ εὐσεβῶς, ἅπερ αὐτοῖς πρῶτον τοῖς οὖσι τοιούτοις ἀγαθὰ ἔπειτα τῷ θεῷ φίλα, τὸν δὲ κάκιστον Ἱεροβόαμον ἐμιμήσατο καὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀπολομένης τῆς ἐκείνου…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 4 59620Arsinoites (?)249 BC–240 BC

δέομαι οὖν σου, βασιλεῦ, ἐπειδὴ ὁ μὲν φθαρεὶς ὑπὸ τῆς Ἀρσινόης ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἵνα μὴ ἐνδείξηται ὡς ἔστιν αὑτοῦ ἡ οἰκία … … … ένη ἀνακαλέσηται

SB 6 9156ArsinoitesAD 300

ἠθέλησεν καὶ διʼ ἡμῶν ἀξιωθῆναι, ὡς διὰ γραμμάτων τὴν προαίρεσίν σου … ον ἐνδιαθέτως ἐνδείξασθαι σπουδάσῃς. διὰ ταῦτα γράφομεν πρὸς τὴν σὴν καλοκαγαθίαν, ἵνα σπουδάσῃς τῷ ἀνδρί. ἔφη γὰρ

οὖν νῦν δεηθεὶς θελήσεις καὶ αὐτὸς τὴν αὐτὴν ἴσην εὔνοιαν καὶ τιμὴν πρὸς ἐμὲ ἐνδείξασθαι. ε … κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον τοῦ Παύλου οἶνον ἐφʼ ἑ

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
τὸho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
ἔργονergon work G2041 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
169× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This term refers to work, toil, or occupation, and can also imply an act or deed. In the Bible, it is used to describe various tasks and activities, such as Jesus' work on earth and the deeds of Christians.
Amplified meaning
task, occupation
Tyndale gloss
work
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔργον, transliterated as ergon, means 'work' or 'deed' and is derived from a root meaning 'to work.' It encompasses a wide range of meanings, including tasks, actions, and products of labor. In the New Testament, it is frequently used to describe both human actions and divine works, appearing in verses like John 3:21 and Ephesians 2:10.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔργον, -ου, τό (originally Ϝέργον, work), [very freq. in LXX, chiefly for מַעֲשֶׂה, מְלָאכָה, also for עֲבֹדָה, פֹּעַל, etc. ;]

work, task, employment: Mk 13:34, Jo 4:34 17:4, Ac 13:2, Phl 1:22 2:30, I Th 5:13, al.; of an enterprise or undertaking (De 15:10, Wi 2:12), Ac 5:38.

a deed, action: Tit 1:16, Ja 1:25 . disting. from λόγος, Lk 24:19, Ro 15:18, II Th 2:17

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔργον, -ου, τό, anciently Fepyov, (Germ.Werk, [ Eng. work; ef. Vanitek p. 9227); Sept. for Ὁ}, 772y, and countless times for man and wy; work i. 6. 1. business, employment, that with which any one is occupied : Mk. xiii. 34 (διδόναι τινὶ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ); Acts xiv. 26 (πληροῦν) ; 1 Tim. iii. 1; thus of the work of salvation committed by God to Christ: διδόναι and τελειοῦν, Jn. xvii. 4; of the work to be done by the apostles and other Christian teachers, as well as by the presiding officers of the religious assemblies, Acts xiii. 2; xv. 38; 1 Th. v. 13; Phil. i. 22; τὸ ἔργον τινός, yen. of the subj., the work which one does, service which one either performs or ought to perform, 1 Th. v. 13; ἔργον ποιεῖν τινος to do the work of one (i. 6. incumbent upon him), εὐαγγελιστοῦ, 2 Tim. iv.5; τὸ ἔργον τινός i. e. assigned by one and to be done for his sake: τὸ ἔργον τοῦ θεοῦ τελειοῦν, used of…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔργον. A few miscellaneous exx. of this common word (MGr ἔργο) will suffice : P Petr II. 11 (1) (mid. iii/B.c.) εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν καὶ μηθέν σε τῶν ἔργων κωλύει, πειράθητι ἐλθεῖν els τὰ ᾿Αρσινόεια, P Par 667: (i/B.c.) ὧν τὰ ἔργα ἀναβάλουσιν (1 --λλ--}, ‘‘whose work is postponed,” P Oxy XII. 1457} (B.C. 4-3) O[vous] θηλήας δύο. . ἐργαζομένας pov τὰ ἴδια ἔργα, P Ryl II. 154° (a.p. 66) τὰ kat’ ἔϊτο]ς γεωργικὰ ἔργα πάντα, and P Tebt 11. 423% (early iii/A.D.) ἄλλοτέ σοι ἔγραψα ὑπομιμνήσκων περὶ τῶν ἔργων. In P Giss I. 201° (ii/A.D.) the word is almost = ‘‘ sample ”—épyé[fo]par τὰ ἔρια! . . . ἃ] ἔγραψας... ὁποῖ]ον δέ σοι χρῶ[μ]α ἀρέσκει, [δήλω]σον δι᾽ ἐπι[σ]τολῆς ἢ μεικρὸν ἔρ[γο]ν (or ἔρ[ιο Jv, see 5.U. ἀρέσκω) αὐτοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔργον (ergon) — work.

ἔργον,

Doric dialect ϝέργον [Refs 6th c.BC+], Elean ϝάργον [Refs 6th c.BC+] weorc (neuter) 'work', Avest. var[schwa]za-):— work, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially in plural, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὰ σ᾽ αὐτῆς ἔργα κόμιζε see to thine own tasks, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

1. in [Refs 8th c.BC+]works or deeds of war, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν τῷ ἔ. during the action, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἔργου ἔχεσθαι to engage in battle, [Refs]

2. of peaceful contests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ἔργα θῆκε κάλλιστ᾽ ἀμφὶ κόμαις placed [the reward of] noble deeds about his hair, [Refs]

3. of works of industry,

3. a of tillage, tilled lands, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὔτε βοῶν οὔτ᾽ ἀνδρῶν φαίνετο ἔργα [Refs] —the title of Hesiod's work; πατρώϊα ἔ. their father's lands, [Refs 8th c.BC+] will neither go to our farms, [Refs]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔργον

ergon

from a primary (but obsolete) ergo (to work); toil (as an effort or

occupation); by implication, an act:--deed, doing, labour, work.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔργον, ου, τό

n.n.

work, labor, action, deed

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔργον ergon 169x

anything done or to be done; a deed, work, action, Jn. 3:21; Eph. 2:10; 2 Cor. 9:8, et al. freq.; duty enjoined, office, charge, business, Mk. 13:34; Jn. 4:34, et al. freq.; a process, course of action, Jas. 1:4; a work, product of an action or process, Acts 7:41; Heb. 1:10; substance in effect, Rom. 2:15

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔργον ἔργον, ου, τό, Ε῎ργω work, Hom., etc.; τὰ σαυτῆς ἔργα κόμιζε mind your own business, Hom.:

in Il. mostly of deeds of war, πολεμήϊα ἔργα Il., etc.; so, ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ during the action, Thuc.; ἔργου ἔχεσθαι to engage in battle, id. Thuc.

of works of industry, tilled lands, fields, farms, Hom.; οὔτε βοῶν οὔτ᾽ ἀνδρῶν ἔργα (cf. Virgil's hominumque boumque labores), Il.; ἔργα Ἰθάκης the tilled lands of Ithaca, Od.; so in attic, τὰ κατ᾽ ἀγροὺς ἔργα, etc.:—then, generally, property, wealth, possessions, ἔργον ἀέξειν Od.

of women's work, weaving, Hom.

of other occupations, θαλάσσια ἔργα fishing, as a way of life, Od.; periphr., ἔργα δαιτός works of feasting, Il.; so, ἔργα θήρας, etc. Xen., etc.:—in attic also of all kinds of works, such as…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ See INDUSTRY

→ See LABOR

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
59%works
works59% · 103×work29% · 51×deeds7% · 13×deed3% · 5×other renderings2% · 4×

176 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial47%object33%subject14%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 169 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
κατάσύἐκ
ἐκ
οὐNegὅτιthat, since, becσύ
καλόςbeautiful, good, wor
Article theπαρέχωI offer, provideπερί
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
πρόςεἰςἐν
ἐν
δυνατόςpowerful, able, DisjπλουτέωI become rich
ἔργονwork169×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godπατήρfather, Father, χείρa hand
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,πονηρόςevil, bad, wickeἐν
ἀγαθόςgood
καίand, even, also,δόξαhonor, renown, gὅς
ὅς
ποιέωI do, makeἐγώδίδωμιI offer, give
νόμοςa law, the Mosaic La
οὐNegἐάνCondὅτιthat, since, bec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔργον · 169× in the New Testament
John Revelation James Romans Acts Hebrews 1 Corinthians Galatians Titus 1 Timothy 2 Timothy Matthew

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 285 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.19c. AD 75–95

ἰστέον οὖν, ὅτι πάντων ἐκεῖνος ἀναγκαιότατον ἡγήσατο τῷ καὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ μέλλοντι βίον οἰκονομήσειν καλῶς καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις νομοθετεῖν θεοῦ πρῶτον φύσιν κατανοῆσαι καὶ τῶν ἔργων τῶν ἐκείνου θεατὴν τῷ νῷ γενόμενον οὕτως παράδειγμα τὸ πάντων ἄριστον…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.6c. AD 100

Τρία οὖν δόγματά ἐστιν κυρίου: ζωῆς ἐλπίς, ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος πίστεως ἡμῶν: καὶ δικαιοσύνη, κρίσεως ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος: ἀγάπη εὐφροσύνης καὶ ἀγαλλιάσεως ἔργων δικαιοσύνης μαρτυρία.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 2 59291Philadelphia (Arsinoites)252 BC

Ζήνωνι χαίρειν Ἁρμάεις καὶ Τεῶς. ἐνέβημεν εἰς τὰ ἔργα ἀπὸ ἔτους λδ, σοῦ συντάξαντος ἡμῖν τοῖς ἔργοις προσέχειν τετράμηνον. ἔστιν δὲ ἡμῖν μῆνες

P.Cair. Zen. 2 59296Arsinoites251 BC

τοὺς … διώρυγι καὶ εἰς … ὡς τῶν δ … γίνονται δραχμαὶ ρνδ γίνονται ἔργων δραχμαὶ φκβ εἰσὶ δὲ φ καὶ ὥστε Ἄνδρωνι εἰς τοὺς ἐν Φιλαδελφείαι φυλακίτας καὶ

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59369Krokodilopolis (Arsinoites)242 BC

ὅτι ἐπίστῃ με ε οικοτημον. καλῶς οὖν ποιήσεις γράψας Ἀγήνορι ὅπως ἀφεθεὶς πρὸς τοῖς ἔργοις γένωμαι καὶ μὴ ἐν τῆι φυλακῆι καταφθαρῶ. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους ζ, Ἐπεὶφ

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
τοῦho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
νόμουnomos law G3551 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
194× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for law, referring to a set of rules or regulations, such as Moses' law or the law of Christ in Galatians 6:2.
Amplified meaning
God's commandments, divine principles
Tyndale gloss
law
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

νόμος refers to a law or custom, derived from the idea of distribution. It encompasses various meanings, including general law, the Mosaic law, and Christian teachings. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as the law of Moses and principles of Christian conduct. Notably, it is used in verses like Romans 3:27 and Galatians 6:2.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νόμος, -ου, ὁ

(< νέμω, to deal out, distribute),

[in LXX chiefly for תּוֹרָה, also for חֻקָּה, etc.;]

that which is assigned, hence, usage, custom, then law; in NT (only in Mt, Jo, Ja, and the Lucan and Pauline bks.);

of law in general: Ro 3:27 5:13b; pl., of divine laws, He 8:10 10:16; ὁ ν. τ. Χριστοῦ, Ga 6:2; (τ.) ἐλευθερίας, Ja 1:25 2:12; βασιλικιός (Hort., in l.; Deiss., LAE, 3673), Ja 2:8.

Of a force or influence impelling to action: Ro 7:21, 23a, 25 8:2.

Of the Mosaic law: Mt 5:18, Lk 2:27, Jo 1:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

νόμος, -ov, 6, (νέμω to divide, distribute, apportion), in prof. auth. fr. Hes. down, anything established, anything received by usage, a custom, usage, law; in Sept. very often for ΓΙ ΓΙ, also for 7p, ΠῚ, ete. In the N. T. a command, law; and 1. of any law whatsoever: διὰ ποίου νόμου; Ro. iii. 27; νόμος δικαιοσύνης, a law or rule producing a state approved of God, i. e. by the observance of which we are approved of God, Ro. ix. 31, ef. Meyer [see ed. Weiss], Fritzsche, Philippi ad loe.; α precept or injunction: κατὰ νόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκ. Heb. vii. 16; plur. of the things prescribed by the divine will, Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; νόμος τοῦ νοός, the rule of action prescribed by reason, Ro. vii. 23; the mention of the divine law causes those things even which in opposition to this law impel to action, and therefore seem to have the force of a law, to be designated by the term νόμος, as ἕτερος…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νόμος (nomos) — law.

νόμος, ὁ,

(νέμω) that which is in habitual practice, use or possession, not in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I. usage, custom, [Μοῦσαι] μέλπονται πάντων τε νόμους καὶ ἤθεα κεδνά [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔνθα ν. (i.e. ἐστί) with infinitive, where it is the custom.., [Refs 7th c.BC+]; ν. πάντων βασιλεύς custom is lord of all, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: hence, law, ordinance, τόνδε.. ν. διέταξε Κρονίων.. θηρσὶ.. ἐσθέμεν ἀλλήλους [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ν. κοινός, ={ὀρθὸς λόγος}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. b in VT, of the law of God, ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ [LXX]; νόμον ὃν ἐνετείλατο ὑμῖν Μωϋσῆς[LXX]; so in NT, ὁ ν. Μωϋσέως [NT]; ὁ ν. τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς, opposed to ὁ ν. τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

νόμος

nomos

from a primary nemo (to parcel out, especially food or grazing to

animals); law (through the idea of prescriptive usage), genitive case

(regulation), specially, (of Moses (including the volume); also of the

Gospel), or figuratively (a principle):--law.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νόμος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a law, the Mosaic Law

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νόμος nomos 194x

a law, Rom. 4:15; 1 Tim. 1:9; the Mosaic law, Mt. 5:17, et al. freq.; the Old Testament Scripture, Jn. 10:34; a legal tie, Rom. 7:2, 3; a law, a rule, standard, Rom. 3:27; a rule of life and conduct, Gal. 6:2, Jas. 1:25

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

νόμος anything assigned, a usage, custom, law, ordinance, Lat. institutum, Hes.; νόμος πάντων βασιλεύς custom is lord of all, Pind. ap. Hdt.; κατὰ νόμον according to custom or law, Hes., Hdt., attic; poet. κὰν νόμον Pind.:— παρὰ νόμον contrary to law, Aesch.:—dat. νόμῳ by custom, conventionally, opp. to φύσει, Hdt., Arist.:—at Athens νόμοι were Solon.'s laws, those of Draco being called θεσμοί.

ἐν χειρῶν νόμῳ by the law of force, in the fight or scuffle, Hdt.; ἐν χειρὸς νόμῳ in actual warfare, Arist.; also, ἐς χειρῶν νόμον ἀπικέσθαι to come to blows, Hdt.

a musical mode or strain, Aesch., Plat., etc.; νόμοι κιθαρῳδικοί Ar.

a song sung in honour of some god, Hdt.; νόμοι πολεμικοί war- tunes, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Law

A rule of action. (1.) The Law of Nature is the will of God as to human conduct, founded on the moral difference of things, and discoverable by natural light (Rom. 1:20; 2:14, 15). This law binds all men at all times. It is generally designated by the term conscience, or the capacity of being influenced by the moral relations of things.

(2.) The Ceremonial Law prescribes under the Old Testament the rites and ceremonies of worship. This law was obligatory only till Christ, of whom these rites were typical, had finished his work (Heb. 7:9, 11; 10:1; Eph. 2:16). It was fulfilled rather than abrogated by the gospel.

(3.) The Judicial Law, the law which directed the civil policy of the Hebrew nation.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The word is properly used, in Scripture as elsewhere, to express a definite commandment laid down by any recognized authority; but when the word is used with the article, and without any words of limitation, it refers to the expressed will to God, and in nine cases out of ten to the Mosaic law, or to the Pentateuch of which it forms the chief portion. The Hebrew word torah (law) lays more stress on its moral authority, as teaching the truth and guiding in the right way; the Greek nomos (law), on its constraining power as imposed and enforced by a recognized authority. The sense of the word, however, extends its scope and assumes a more abstracts character in the writings of St. Paul. Nomos , when used by him with the article, still refers in general to the law of Moses; but when used without the article, so as to embrace any manifestation of "law," it includes all powers which act on…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

In the Bible, signifies sometimes the whole word of God, Ps 19:7-11 119:1-176 Isa 8:20; sometimes the Old Testament, Joh 10:34 15:25, and sometimes the five books of Moses, which formed the first of the three divisions of the Hebrew Scriptures, Lu 24:44 Ac 13:15. The Pentateuch was probably "the law," a copy of which every king was to transcribe for himself and study, and which was to be made known to young and old, in public and in private, De 6:7 17:18,19 31:9-19,26. In other places the Mosaic institutions as a whole are intend by "the law," in distinction from the…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Ps 19:7-9; 119:1-8; Pr 28:4,5; Mt 22:21; Lu 16:17; 20:22-25; Ro 2:14,15; 7:7,12,14; 13:10; 1Ti 1:5,8-10; Jas 1:25; 1Jo 3:4; 5:3

→ See LITIGATION

→ See COMMANDMENTS

→ See DUTY TO GOD

→ OF MOSES

→ (Contained in the books of Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy)

Given at Sinai Ex 19; De 1:1; 4:10-13; 33:2; Hab 3:3

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%law
law93% · 184×the law2% · 4×other renderings3% · 6×other renderings2% · 3×

197 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial43%object22%subject22%predicate10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 194 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνκατάἀπό
ὑπό
Article theεἰμίI am, existὡςas, like as, how
ἔργονwork, labor, action,
ἐκχωρίςapart from, with
γάρfor
Article theδιάἄχριas far as, up to
ἐν
γράφωI writeδύναμαιI am powerful, aὅσος
νόμοςlaw194×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἁμαρτίαa sinπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐδείςno one, none, noπαρανομέωI act contrary t
ΜωϋσῆςMoses
καίand, even, also,ἐγώἀνάγωI lead up, put t
οὐNeg
δικαιόωI make righteousφθάνωI anticipate, prεἰμίI am, exist
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theκαλόςbeautiful, good,ἐκ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceνόμος · 194× in the New Testament
Romans Galatians Acts John Hebrews James 1 Corinthians Luke Matthew Philippians 1 Timothy Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 138 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.10c. AD 75–95

Εὗρον τοίνυν, ὅτι Πτολεμαίων μὲν ὁ δεύτερος μάλιστα δὴ βασιλεὺς περὶ παιδείαν καὶ βιβλίων συναγωγὴν σπουδάσας ἐξαιρέτως ἐφιλοτιμήθη τὸν ἡμέτερον νόμον καὶ τὴν κατʼ αὐτὸν διάταξιν τῆς πολιτείας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φωνὴν μεταβαλεῖν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.6c. AD 100

ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

τῶι ἐξ ἐμοῦ ἐξ Σαραπιάδος τῆς Ἐσθλάδου τοῦ Θεωνος ἀστῆς ἧι συνήμην γυναικὶ κατὰ νόμους καὶ κατὰ διαθήκην τὴν κεχρηματισμένην διὰ τοῦ ἐν Διὸς πόλει τῆι μικρᾶι ἀρχείου ἐπὶ

ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι Ταθώτηι Ἁρυώτου Περσίνῃ ᾗ σύνειμι γυναικὶ κατὰ νόμους, πλὴν στρώματος ἑνὸς καὶ κλείνης τορυνευτῆς α Πατ … ει καὶ Πετεσοράθηι τῶν Παχνούβιος

τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων, ἐν οἷς καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ Κόχλακος τῆς Ἀραβίας τοῦ δηλουμένου Παθυρίτου νομοῦ μέρους ἡμίσους ἀπὸ ἐδάφους ἀμπελῶνος ἀρουρῶν β ἡμίσους ἢ ὅσαν ἂν ἦι ἐπὶ τὸ

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
γραπτὸνgraptos written G1123 Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means something is written or inscribed, used in Romans 2:15 to describe the law written on people's hearts. It emphasizes the idea that something is recorded or noted, often in a spiritual sense.
Amplified meaning
inscribed, engraved
Tyndale gloss
written
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

γραπτός is derived from γράφω and means 'written' or 'inscribed.' It covers a range of meanings from 'painted' to 'marked with letters' and includes uses in legal contexts. In the New Testament, it appears in Romans 2:15, where it refers to something that is written. The lexicons provide consistent definitions without significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γραπτός, -ή, -όν

(< γράφω),

[in LXX for מִכְתָּב ;]

painted.

written: Ro 2:15.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γραπτός, -7, -dv, written: Ro. ii.15. [Gorg. apol. Palam. p- 190 sub fin. ; Sept.; al.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

γραπτός AV, RV): cf. Deut 20°, where the word again denotes subordinate military officials, presumably those who kept the register of the army (Driver ad@/.). Deissmann (B.S, p. 110 ff.) has shown how readily this technical usage of the word would be adopted by the Alexandrian translators in view of the practice of Igyptian Greek. Thus in P Par 6315 (p.c. 165) we hear of a certain Kumelus τοῦ γραμματέως τῶν μαχίμων, ‘the registrar of the μάχιμοι" (Mahaffy, P Petr III. p. 31), and in P Lond 23% (B.c. 158-7) (=I. p. 41) of a γραμματέα τῶν δ[υ]ναμέων. See also Archiv iv. p. 33f. for the office of γραμματεὺς τῶν κατοίκων ἱππέων. The word is very common to denote the official who had to supply returns to the central authority on the number of inhabitants in a village, on their holdings in land, etc. In Sy// 7907! (i/B.C.) τὸν γραμματέα τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τὸν προφήτην we have an example of the word…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γραπτός (graptos) — written.

γραπτ-ός, ή, όν,

painted, ζῷα [Refs 5th c.BC+], paintings, opposed to γλυπτά, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. marked as with letters, ἁ γραπτὰ ὑάκινθος [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

II. written, νόμοι γ. [Refs 5th c.BC+], rescripts, proclamations, [LXX]; legal documents, bonds, [Refs 4th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

γραπτός

graptos

from 1125; inscribed (figuratively):--written.

see GREEK for 1125

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γραπτός, ή, όν

Adj

written

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γραπτός graptos 1x

written, Rom. 2:15*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γραπτός γράφω marked as with letters, ἁ γραπτὰ ὑάκινθος Theocr.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASN — Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%written
written100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceγραπτός · 1× in the New Testament
Romans
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 1st c. AD 1st c. BC 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

Θράσωνος. τούτων ἀδίκως ἐνποιούμενοι και … … ο εἰς τὸν Θράσωνα … ιθεσθαι γραπτὸν ὅρκον … … ς ὑπαρχ … … αὐτῶι κατὰ τῶν ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν

BGU 16 2602Techtho (Herakleopolites)15 BC–14 BC

σε, ἐπεὶ ὁ ἀγρὸς ἡμῶν … παρέσταται, ἀποστεῖλαι ἢ σφραγειταν Πτολλᾶτι τῶι σῶι ἢ γραπτὸν ἵνα κωλύσῃ τὸν Ἔρωτα ἀπάγειν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ τὰ χώματα. ἔρρωσο

Chrest.Wilck. 122Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 6

Μαρρέους οὐδ’ οὐ μὴ γένηται μου γυνή ὑπόδεξαι μοι καὶ κύρωσόν μοι τοῦτο τὸ γραπτόν. πρόην δ’ ἦν ἡ Ταπεθεὺς Ὡρίωνος γυνήι. ἔτους λε Καίσαρος Παχὼν α

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
ἐνen in G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
ταῖςho the G3588 Article · dative · plural · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DPF — Article · dative · plural · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DPF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
καρδίαιςkardia hearts G2588 Noun · dative · plural · feminine
156× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for heart refers to the seat of thoughts, feelings, and emotions, like in 2 Kings 18:14. It's where our moral and spiritual condition lies. The KJV translates it as heart or broken-hearted.
Amplified meaning
the seat of thoughts, feelings, and emotions
Tyndale gloss
heart
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καρδία (kardia) means 'heart' and encompasses both the physical organ and the metaphorical seat of life, emotions, thoughts, and intentions. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, often relating to spiritual and moral conditions (e.g., Matthew 5:8). The term is derived from a root meaning to quiver or palpitate, linking it to feelings and desires.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καρδία, -ας, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly for לֵב, לֵבָב;]

the heart,

the bodily organ which is regarded as the seat of life (II Ki 18:14, IV Ki 9:24, al.).

In a psychological sense, the seat of man's collective energies, the focus of personal life, the seat of the rational as well as the emotional and volitional elements in human life, hence that wherein lies the moral and religious condition of the man (DB, ii, 317 f.; DGG, ii, 344a);

of the seat of physical life (Jg 19:5, Ps 101 (102):5 103 (104):15): Ac 14:17, Ja 5:5;

of the seat of spiritual life: Mt 5:8, Mk 7:19, Lk 1:51,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καρδία, -as, 7, poetic κραδία and καρδίη (in the latter form almost always in Hom. [only at the beginning of a line in three places; everywhere else by metathesis xpadin; Ebeling, Lex. Hom. 5. v.}), [fr. a root signifying to quiver or palpitate; οἵ. Curtius § 39; Vaniéek p. 1097 (Etym. Magn. 491, 56 mapa τὸ κραδαίνω, τὸ σείω " ἀεικίνητος yap ἡ καρδία): allied with Lat. cor; Eng. heart]; Sept. for 37 and 239; the heart; 1. prop. that organ in the animal body which is the centre of the circulation of the blood, and hence was regarded as the seat of physical life: 2S. xviii. 14; 2 K. ix. 24; Tob. vi. 5 (4), 7 (6) sq.,17(16). Hence 2. univ. καρδία denotes the seat and centre of all physical and spiritual life; and a. the vigor and sense of physical life (Ps. ci. (cii.) 5; στήρισον τὴν καρδίαν σου Ψψωμῷ ἄρτου, Judg. xix. 5; to which add Ps. ciii. (civ.) 15): τρέφειν τὰς καρδίας, Jas. v.55…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καρδία (kardia) — heart.

καρδί-α, ἡ,

Ionic dialect καρδίη, Epic dialect κρᾰδίη (καρδίη in [Refs 8th c.BC+] only in καρδίῃ ἄλληκτον πολεμίζειν ἠδὲ μάχεσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] always in Trag., except in some dact. and anapaest meter verses, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect κάρζα [Refs] (but καρδία [Refs 7th c.BC+] κορζία (Paph.), [Refs 5th c.AD+]:—heart, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη μεγάλα στέρνοισι πατάσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πηδᾷ ἡ κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: especially as the seat of feeling and passion, as rage or anger, οἰδάνεται κραδίη Χόλῳ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καρδίης πλέως full of heart, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; of fear or courage, κυνὸς ὄμματ᾽ ἔχων, κραδίην δ᾽ ἐλάφοιο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [σφηκῶν] κραδίην καὶ θυμὸν ἔχοντες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν νέον τίνα οἴει κ. ἴσχει; what do you think are his feelings? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of sorrow or joy, ἐν κραδίῃ μέγα πένθος ἄεξε [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καρδία

kardia

prolonged from a primary kar (Latin cor, "heart"); the heart, i.e.

(figuratively) the thoughts or feelings (mind); also (by analogy) the

middle:--(+ broken-)heart(-ed).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καρδία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

the heart, inner life, intention

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καρδία kardia 156x

the heart, regarded as the seat of feeling, impulse, affection, desire, Mt. 6:21; 22:37; Phil. 1:7; the heart, as the seat of intellect, Mt. 13:15; Rom. 1:21; the heart, as the inner and mental frame, Mt. 5:8; Lk. 16:15; 1 Pet. 3:4; the conscience, 1 Jn. 3:20, 21; the heart, the inner part, middle, center, Mt. 12:40

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καρδία καρδία, ἡ, the heart, ἐν στέρνοισι κραδίη πατάσσει Il.; κραδίη ἔξω στήθεος ἐκθρώσκει, of one panic-stricken, id. Il.; οἰδάνεται κραδίη χόλῳ id. Il., etc.; ἐκ τῆς καρδίας φιλεῖν Ar.; τἀπὸ καρδίας λέγειν, Lat. ex animo, to speak freely, Eur.

the stomach, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPF — Noun · dative · plural · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
65%heart
heart65% · 105×hearts32% · 52×other renderings2% · 4×

161 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial55%object21%subject17%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 156 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνσύκαίand, even, also,
ἐπί
καίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
ἐν
ὅστιςμήNeg
ἐκ
δέbut, on the otheἀνυπόκριτοςunfeigned, witho
καρδίαhearts156×
what comes after →
σύ
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becArticle the
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakπόρρωCompχρονίζωI delay, tarry
ἐγώ
καίωI ignite, light,ὅςγάρfor
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεὑρίσκωI findἐκ
Article the
λαόςa people, the crστόμαthe mouth, speecγῆthe earth, soil,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαρδία · 156× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Matthew Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Mark John Ephesians 1 Corinthians Colossians James

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 405 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 118c. AD 40

τὰ δ’ ἐντὸς λεγόμενα σπλάγχνα στόμαχος, καρδία, πνεύμων, σπλήν, ἧπαρ, νεφροὶ δύο.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 5.193c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ μὲν πρὸς τὴν χαρὰν τὴν τοῦ ὀνείρατος ἀνεπήδησεν ἀπὸ τοῦ θρόνου, πλήξας δʼ αὐτὸν Ἰούδης εἰς τὴν καρδίαν καὶ τὸ ξιφίδιον ἐγκαταλιπὼν ἔξεισι προσκλίνας τὴν θύραν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.8c. AD 100

ἀλλ̓ ἡ τοῦτο ἐνετειλάμην αὐτοῖς: ἕκαστος ὑμῶν κατὰ τοῦ πλησίον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ἑαυτοῦ κακίαν μὴ μνησικακείτω, καὶ ὅρκον ψευδῆ μὴ ἀγαπᾶτε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 5th c. AD 6th c. AD
O.Eleph.Wagner 306ElephantineAD 178–AD 179

ἕως Φαῶφι κ … Ἀντωνίνου Κομμόδου … ἀπὸ μηνὸς Φαῶφι ϛ … κάρδιαι καιναί … ὀφθαλμις … … εχων

P.Lond. 6 1914Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 335

ἀκούσαντες οὖν τινὲς στρατιῶται οἱ ἐν τῇ παρεμβολῇ καὶ φόβον θεοῦ ἔχοντες ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ἦρκαν αὐτοὺς καὶ ἔκρυψαν ἐν ταῖς κέλλαις ἐν τῇ παρεμβολῇ. καὶ ἐκείνων μὴ εὑρεθέντων

P.Lond. 6 1917Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 330–AD 340

ἐγὼ Ὡρίων, ἵνα ἐπάρωσιν αὐτῶν τὰς ἁγιωτάτας αὐτῶν χεῖρας πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ἐν ὅλῃ καρδίᾳ αὐτῶν ὡς τύπος σταυροῦ καὶ μὴ ἀποστερήσωσί με καὶ μὴ ἐ … ωσί με,

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
αὐτῶνautos when they G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Romans than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GPM — Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςwhen they5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
συμμαρτυρούσηςsummartureō are bearing witness G4828 Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · singular · feminine
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To testify with someone means to agree with their statement, like in Romans 2:15 and 8:16, where the Holy Spirit testifies with our spirits.
Amplified meaning
testifying, affirming
Tyndale gloss
to testify with
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word συμμαρτυρέω (i.e. *summartureō*) is composed of the prefix συν- meaning 'with' and μαρτυρέω meaning 'to bear witness.' It means to testify jointly or corroborate with another. The New Testament uses it in contexts of shared testimony, particularly in Romans, where it emphasizes the collaborative nature of witnessing.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* συν-μαρτυρέω (Rec. συμμ-), -ῶ,

to bear witness with: Ro 2:15; c. dat., Ro 8:16; seq. ὅτι, Ro 9:1.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

συμ-μαρτυρέω, -ὦ [Τ᾿ WII συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.) ]; to bear witness with, bear joint witness (with one): συμμαρτυpovons τῆς συνειδήσεως, their conscience also bearing witness, Ro. ii. 15 (i.e. together with the deeds of the Gentiles, which accord with the law of God and so bear witness [ef. W. 580 (539)]); foll. by ὅτε, Ro. ix. 1 (besides the fact that the close fellowship I have with Christ compels me to tell the truth); τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν, with our spirit already giving its testimony, Ro. viii. 16. Mid. pres. 1 pers. sing. συμμαρτυροῦμαι, 1 testify on my own behalf besides (i.e. besides those things which I have already testified in this book), Rev. xxii. 18 Ree. ; but the true reading here, μαρτυρῶ, was restored by Grsb. (Soph., Eur., Thue., Plat., al.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

συνμαρτυρέω, “bear witness with” (Rom 2 aZ): cf. BGU I. 8618 (A.D. 155), where the signature of each attesting witness is accompanied by the words συνμαρτυρῶ kal συνσφρακιῶ. and for ovppaptipopar see the note to PSI VI. 696° (iii/A.D.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

συμμαρτυρέω (summartureō) — to testify with.

συμμαρτῠρέω,

bear witness with or in support of another, ξυμμαρτυρῶ σοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τι to a fact, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; followed by a relative, ὡς.. σύ μοι ξυμμαρτυρῇς οἵα πέφυκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. Astrology texts, to be in aspect with, configurate with, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

συμμαρτυρέω

summartureo

from 4862 and 3140; to testify jointly, i.e. corroborate by

(concurrent) evidence:--testify unto, (also) bear witness (with).

see GREEK for 4862

see GREEK for 3140

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

συμμαρτυρέω

v.

I bear witness together with

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

συμμαρτυρέω symmartyreō 3x

to testify or bear witness together with another, confirm, add testimony, Rom. 2:15; 8:16; 9:1*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

συμμαρτυρέω fut. ήσω to bear witness with or in support of another, c. dat., Soph., Thuc.; τι to a fact, Solon., Xen.; also, ς. τινι πάντα ὡς ἀληθῆ λέγει Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-GSF — Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-GSF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wit'-nes (nouns `edh, and `edhah, and verb `anah; martus, with all derivative words and their compounds): The word "witness" is used of inanimate things, e.g. the heap of stones testifying to the covenant between Jacob and Laban (Ge 31:44-54), and the So of Moses. (De 31:19,21). The main use of the word is forensic, and from this use all other applications are naturally derived. Important legal agreements required the attestation of witnesses, as in the case of the purchase of property, or a betrothal (Ru 4:1-11, where we are told that the ancient form of attestation was by a man drawing off his shoe and giving it to his neighbor).

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Witness

More than one witness was required in criminal cases (Deut. 17:6; 19:15). They were the first to execute the sentence on the condemned (Deut. 13:9; 17:7; 1 Kings 21:13; Matt. 27:1; Acts 7:57, 58). False witnesses were liable to punishment (Deut. 19:16-21). It was also an offence to refuse to bear witness (Lev. 5:1).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

Among people with whom writing is not common the evidence of a transaction is given by some tangible memorial or significant ceremony: Abraham gave seven ewe-lambs to Abimelech as an evidence of his property in the well of Beersheba. Jacob raised a heap of stones, "the heap of witness." as a boundary-mark between himself and Laban. (Genesis 21:30; 31:47,52) The tribes of Reuben and Gad raised an "altar" as a witness to the covenant between themselves and the rest of the nation. Joshua set up a stone as an evidence of the allegiance promised by Israel to God. (Joshua 22:10,26,34; 24:26,27) But written evidence was by no means unknown to the Jews. Divorce was to be proved by a written document. (24:1,3) In civil contracts, at least in later times documentary evidence was required…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

One who testifies to any fact from his own personal knowledge. Under the Mosaic law, two witnesses under oath were necessary to convict a person charged with a capital crime, Nu 35:30; and if the criminal was stoned, the witnesses were bound to cast the first stones, De 17:6-7 Ac 7:58. The Greek word for witness is MARTYR, which see.

The apostles were witnesses, in proclaiming to the world the facts of the gospel, Ac 1:8,22 2:32 2Pe 1:12,16-18; and Christ is a "faithful witness," in testifying to men of heavenly things, Joh 3:12

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
αὐτῶνautos to them G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Romans than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GPM — Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςto them5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
τῆςho their G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
their19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
συνειδήσεωςsuneidēsis conscience G4893 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Conscience is a moral awareness that guides our actions, as seen in Romans 2:15 and 1 Corinthians 10:29. It's an inner sense of right and wrong. The Bible often mentions a clear or weak conscience.
Amplified meaning
moral awareness, inner voice
Tyndale gloss
conscience
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

συνείδησις (suneidēsis) refers to consciousness and conscience, derived from the root meaning 'joint knowledge.' It encompasses self-awareness, moral discernment, and the inner sense of right and wrong. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including ethical discussions in Romans and 1 Corinthians. The lexicons note its philosophical depth, particularly in Pauline writings, suggesting a unique connotation distinct from earlier uses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

συν-είδησις, -εως, ἡ

(< συνεῖδον),

[in LXX: Ec 10:20 (מַדָּע), Wi 17:11, Si 42:18 א * ;]

consciousness: c. gen. obj., He 10:2, I Pe 2:19.

In ethical sense, innate discernment, self-judging consciousness, conscience (Stoics and late writers): Ro 2:15 9:1, I Co 10:29, II Co 1:12 4:2 5:11, I Ti 4:2, He 9:14; σ. ἀγαθή, Ac 23:1, I Ti 1:5, 19, I Pe 3:16, 21; ἀσθενής, I Co 8:7, 10; ἀσθενοῦσα…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

συν-είδησις, -ews, 7, (συνεῖδον), Lat. conscientia, [lit. ‘joint-knowledge’; see σύν, II. 4], 1. 6. a. the consciousness of anything: with a gen of the obj., τῶν ἅμαρτιῶν, a soul conscious of sins, Heb. x. 2 (rod μύσους, Diod. 4, 65; συνείδησις εὐγενής, consciousness of nobility; a soul mindful of its noble origin, Hdian. 7, 1, 8 [3 ed. Bekk.]). b. the soul as distinguishing between what is morally good and bad, prompting to do the former and shun the latler, commending the one, condemning the other ; conscience: with a gen. of the subj., ἡ o. τινος, Ro. ii. 15 (where the idea of ἡ συνείδησις is further explained by καὶ μεταξὺ... ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων [ef. W. 580 (539); see ἀπολογέομαι, 2, and συμμαρτυρέω]); Ro. ix. 1; 1 Co. viii. 7 [0 W. § 30, 1 a.], 10,12; x. 29; 2Co.i. 12; iv. 2; v. 11; Heb. ix. 14 (ἡ τοῦ φαύλου συνείδησις, Philo, fragm., vol. ii. p. 659 ed. Mangey [vi. p. 217 sq. ed.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

συνείδησις, (1) lit. “‘co-knowledge,’’ hence ‘‘consciousness’’: P Par Ρ. 422? (ii/A.D.) ὅταν ἰσελθῇς, καλῇ ὥρᾳ, εὑρήσις συνίδησιν, “lorsque tu seras entré, ἃ la bonne heure, tu trouveras les gens au courant de la chose(?)’’ (Ed.), P Ryl II. 116° (A.D. 194) θλειβομένη τῇ συνειδήσει περὶ ὧν ἐνοσφίσατο ἔν τε ἐνδομενείᾳ καὶ ἀποθέτοις, ‘‘oppressed by the consciousness of what she had appropriated both of the furniture and stored articles ’’ (Edd.), P Flor III. 3381? (iii/A.D.) οἶδα yap ὅτι συψειδήσι (‘“‘coscenziosamente,’’ Ed.) σπουδάζεις ἐμοί, P Oxy I, 1231} (iii/iv A.D.) ἤδη γὰρ οἱ τῶν ἄλλων πόλεων συνείδησιν εἰσήνεγκαν τοῖς κολλήγαις αὐτῶν, εἰσῆλθαν, “already the notaries of the other towns have acquainted their colleagues, and they have come in”’ (Edd.), BGU IV. 1024 41-7 (iv/A.D.) τὴν συνείδησιν τ[ῶν πεπραγμένων (?) . ., and P Par 211° (A.D. 616) ὁμολογοῦμεν γνώμῃ ἑκουσίᾳ καὶ αὐθαιρέτῳ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

συνείδησις (suneidēsis) — conscience.

συνείδησις, εως, ἡ,

knowledge shared with another, τῶν ἀλγημάτων (in a midwife) [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. communication, information, εὑρήσεις σ. [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; σ. εἰσήνεγκαν τοῖς κολλήγαις αὐτῶν [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

3. knowledge, λῦε ταῦτα πάντα μὴ διαλείψας ἀγαθῇ σ. (variant{ἀγαθῇ τύχῃ}) [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. consciousness, awareness, [τῆς αὑτοῦ συστάσεως] [NT+5th c.BC+]; inner consciousness, ἐν σ. σου βασιλέα μὴ καταράσῃ [LXX+NT]

5. consciousness of right or wrong doing, conscience, Periander and [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐὰν ἐγκλήματός τινος ἔχῃ σ. [Refs] (a) ii 19; βροτοῖς ἅπασιν ἡ σ. θεός [NT+4th c.BC+]; ἀπρόσκοπος πρὸς τὸν θεόν[NT+2nd c.AD+]; κολαζομένους κατὰ συνείδησιν [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

συνείδησις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

the conscience

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

συνείδησις syneidēsis 30x

consciousness, Heb. 10:2; a present idea, persisting notion, impression of reality, 1 Pet. 2:19; conscience, as an inward moral impression of one’s actions and principles, Acts 23:1; 24:16; Rom. 9:1; 2 Cor. 1:12; conscience, as the inward faculty of moral judgment, Rom. 2:15; 13:5; 1 Cor. 8:7b, 10, 12; 10:25, 27, 28, 29; 2 Cor. 4:2; 5:11; 1 Tim. 1:5, 19; 3:9; 4:2; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

συνείδησις συνείδησις, εως, from συνειδέναι inf. of σύνοιδα self-consciousness: conscience, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

kon'-shens (he suneidesis):

I. SEQUENT CONSCIENCE

1. Judicial

2. Punitive

3. Predictive

4. Social

II. ANTECEDENT CONSCIENCE

III. INTUITIONAL AND ASSOCIATIONAL THEORIES

IV. THE EDUCATION OF CONSCIENCE

V. HISTORY AND LITERATURE

1. Earlier Views

2. Reformation and After

I. Sequent Conscience.

The aspect of conscience earliest noticed in literature and most frequently referred to at all times is what is called the Sequent Conscience--that is to say, it follows action.

1. Judicial:

This is judicial. No sooner is a decision formed than there ensues a judgment favorable or adverse, a sentence of guilty or not guilty. Conscience has often been compared to a court of law, in which there are culprit, judge, witnesses and jury; but these are all in the subject's own breast, and are in fact himself.

2. Punitive:

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Conscience

That faculty of the mind, or inborn sense of right and wrong, by which we judge of the moral character of human conduct. It is common to all men. Like all our other faculties, it has been perverted by the Fall (John 16:2; Acts 26:9; Rom. 2:15). It is spoken of as “defiled” (Titus 1:15), and “seared” (1 Tim. 4:2). A “conscience void of offence” is to be sought and cultivated (Acts 24:16; Rom. 9:1; 2 Cor. 1:12;

Is that faculty common to all free moral agents, Ro 2:13-15, in virtue of which we discern between right and wrong, and are prompted to choose the former and refuse the latter. Its appointed sphere is in the regulation, according to the will of God revealed in nature and the Bible, of all our being and actions so far as these have a moral character. The existence of this faculty proves the soul accountable at the bar of its Creator, and its voice is in an important sense the voice of God. We feel that when pure and fully informed, it is an unerring guide to duty, and that no possible array of inducements can justify us in disregarding it. In man, however, though this conviction that we must do what is right never fails, yet the value of conscience is greatly impaired by its inhering in a depraved soul, whose evil tendencies warp and…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Job 15:21,24; 27:6; Pr 20:12; Mt 5:15,16; 6:22,23; Lu 11:33-36; Ac 23:1; 24:16; Ro 2:14,15; 7:15-22,23; 9:1; 14:1-23; 1Co 8:7-13; 10:32; 2Co 1:12; 4:2; 5:11; 1Ti 1:5,19; 3:9; Heb 9:14; 10:22; 13:18; 1Pe 2:19; 3:16,21; 1Jo 3:20,21

→ FAITHFUL

INSTANCES OF

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
90%conscience
conscience90% · 28×conscience?3% · 1×consciences3% · 1×a conscience3% · 1×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial48%object26%subject19%predicate7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
διάκαίand, even, also,αὐτός
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἐγώπρός
καθαρόςclean, pure, unstain
ἐν
ἀπρόσκοποςnot offending, not c
ἀσκέωI train, practic
ἄλλοςother, another, diff
ὑπό
συνείδησιςconscience31×
what comes after →
ἀγαθόςgood
πολιτεύομαιI live the life καίand, even, also,ἐπερώτημαinquiry, request
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
πρόςἐνἀγαθόςgood
ἐγώ
ἐνὅτιthat, since, becἀπό
αὐτός
ἀσθενήςweak, infirm, si
ἐλέγχωI rebuke, expose
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come o

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσυνείδησις · 31× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Romans Acts 2 Timothy John Titus
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaThat the Worse Attacks the Better 146c. AD 40

ἱκετεύωμεν οὖν τὸν θεὸν οἱ συνειδήσει τῶν οἰκείων ἀδικημάτων ἐλεγχόμενοι, κολάσαι μᾶλλον ἡμᾶς ἢ παρεῖναι·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 16.103c. AD 75–95

οὐ μὴν ὅ γε Καῖσαρ ἐπιβλέπων αὐτοὺς ὡς εἶχον ἀσύνετον ἐποιεῖτο τὸ μὴ κατὰ συνείδησιν ἀτοπωτέραν, ἀλλʼ ἐξ ἀπειρίας καὶ μετριότητος ὀκνεῖν, ἐλεεινοί τʼ ἐγεγόνεισαν τοῖς παροῦσιν ἰδίᾳ καὶ τὸν πατέρα διεκίνησαν ἀληθινῷ τῷ πάθει συνεχόμενον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 19.12c. AD 100

οὐ προσήξεις ἐπὶ προσευχὴν ἐν συνειδήσει πονηρᾷ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.Fouad 1 28OxyrhynchosAD 59

ἀντικνήμιον, ἐξ οὗ ἔκτοτε κατακλινὴς ἐγενόμην, τῷ ζῆν κινδυνεύων. τοῦ δὲ δούλου φυγόντος κατὰ συνείδησιν ἧς πεποίηται ἐπηρείας, παρακατασχὼν τὸν ὄνον ἐνέκλισα εἰς τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ οἰκίαν. ἐκ τοῦ τοιούτου

P.Mil.Vogl. 1 27Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 129

καὶ σὺ ὁ κύριος, ἐντευχθεὶς ὑφʼ ἡμῶν διʼ ἑτέρου ἀναφορίου ὅτι ἐνθάδε οὖσα, ὑπὸ συνειδήσεως θλιβομένη ἀνέφυγεν εἰς τὸν Ἀρσινοείτην, ὅθεν καὶ ἔστιν, ἔγραψας τῷ τῆς Πολέμωνος μερίδος στρατηγῶι

P.Corn. 14Arsinoites (?)AD 180–AD 192

τῷ πράγματι ἕνεκα τοῦ τὸν διὰ τοῦ ἀναφορίου ἀντίδικον δηλωθέντα περιαλέσθαι. διὰ τὴν περισσὸν συνείδησιν ἀξιῶ, ἐάν σου τῇ τύχῃ δόξῃ, τῆς ἀπὸ σοῦ βοηθείας τυχεῖν. ἔστι δὲ τοῦ

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Romans than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
μεταξὺmetaxu between G3342 Adverb
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Between or meanwhile refers to something happening in a time or place between two things, like in John 4:31. It can also mean after something.
Tyndale gloss
between/meanwhile
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μεταξύ (metaxy) is derived from a combination of μετά and ξύν, meaning 'between' or 'meanwhile.' It functions as both an adverb and a preposition, indicating position or time, as seen in John 4:31 and Matthew 23:35. The entries note its use in various contexts, including physical locations and relationships between people.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μεταξύ

(< μετά + ξύν = σύν),

[in LXX: Ge 31:50, Jg 5:27, III Ki 15:6; 15:32, Wi 4:10 16:19 18:23*;]

adv. of place and time (in NT time only);

between: ἐν τῷ μ. (s.c. χρόνῳ), Jo 4:31;

in late writers (FlJ, Plut., al.), like μετά (adv.), after, afterwards: τὸ μ. σάββατον, Ac 13:42 (cf. Cl., Ro., I Co., 44, 2).

Prep. c. gen., between: of place, Mt 23:35, Lk 11:51 16:26, Ac 12:6; of persons, as to mutual relation, Mt 18:15, Ac 15:9, Ro 2:15.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μεταξύ, (fr. μετά and ξύν, i. q. σύν), adv. ; 1. between (in the midst, Hom. Il. 1,156; Sap. xviii. 23), 8. adverbially of time, ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, in the mean time, cf. ἐν τῷ καθεξῆς (see καθεξῆς) : Jn. iv. 31 (Xen. symp. 1,14; with χρόνῳ added, Plat. rep. 5 p. 450 ¢.; Joseph. antt. 2, 7,1; 6 μεταξὺ χρόνος, Hdian. 3, 8, 20 [10 ed. Bekk.; ef. W.592 sq. (551) ]). b. like a prep. w. a gen. [cf. W. 54, 6]: of place [fr. Hdt. 1, 6 down], Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51; xvi. 26; Acts xii. 6; of parties, Mt. xviii. 15; Actsxv.9; Ro. ii. 15. 2. acc. to a somewhat rare usage of later Grk. (Joseph. e. Ap. 1, 21, 2 [(yet see Miiller ad loc.)]; b. j. 5, 4, 2; Plut. inst. Lae. 42; de diser. amici et δά]. c. 22; Theoph. ad Autol. 1,8 and Otto in loc.; [Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2. 3; Barn. ep. 13, 5]), after, afterwards: τὸ μεταξὺ σάββ. the next (following) sabbath, Acts xiii. 42 [(where see Meyer)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μεταξύ is used prepositionally c. gen., as in Mt 1815, Rom 235, in such passages as P Rein 4415 (A.p. 104) μετὰ τὸν τῆς συμφωνίας τῆς γενομένης μεταξὺ αὐτοῦ καὶ “IovSupas, P Oxy VIII. ττι78 (ς. A.D. 178) μεταξὺ ἡμῶν καὶ ἀρχόντων, P Gen I. 48™ (A.p. 346) τὴν συμ[π]εφωνηθεῖσα[ν] μεταξὺ [ἡμῶν ἀλλήλων τιμήν, P Oxy VII. 10267 (v/a.p.) μεταξὺ ἐλάβομεν Τεροντίου κ[α]ὶ ᾿Ιωάννην (/.-ns) ὥστε λαβεῖν ᾿Ιω[ά]ννην τὰ ἱμάτια κτλ., ‘we have mediated between Gerontius and John to this effect: John shall take the | 5.2. σχῆμα. cloaks” εἴς, (Ed.), PSI I. 71° (vi/a.D.) μεταξὺ ἐμοῦ τε κ(αὶ) τῶν λιτουργῶν, and Kazbel 418} (ii/A.p.) τὸ μεταξὺ βίου θανάτοιό τε. For the adverbial usage in relation to ¢ime, as in Jn 4%, cf. BGU IV. 11537 (B.c. 14) Tod μεταξὺ χρόνον, | τό. 1139 (B.C. 5) ἐν δὲ τῷ μεταξύ, P Giss I. 30? (A.D. 140161), a/.: see also P Oxy X. 1320 (A.D. 497) Opodoyo ὀφείλειν σοι καὶ χρεωστεῖν ἀπὸ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μεταξύ (metaxu) — between/meanwhile.

μεταξύ

(late form μετοξύ [Refs 1st c.AD+], adverb, (μετά, ξύν) properly in the midst: hence,

I. as adverb,

I.1. of Place, betwixt, between, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.2. of Time, between-whiles, meanwhile, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ μ. the intervening events, [Refs 5th c.BC+]present participle, μ. ὀρύσσων ἐπαύσατο in the midst of his digging, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐξαναστάντες μ. δειπνοῦντες in the middle of supper, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἀπαγχομένη μ. κατεκλίθη (κατεκωλύθη Blass), i. e. in the interval between this and reviving, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the middle of my discourse, [Refs 5th c.BC+]participle, μ. ὑπολαβεῖν to interrupt, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τῷ μ. (i.e. χρόνῳ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μεταξύ

metaxu

from 3326 and a form of 4862; betwixt (of place or person); (of time)

as adjective, intervening, or (by implication) adjoining:--between,

mean while, next.

see GREEK for 3326

see GREEK for 4862

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μεταξύ

Adv

meanwhile, afterwards, between

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μεταξύ metaxy 9x

can function as an improper prep., between, Mt. 23:35; Lk. 11:51; 16:26; Acts 15:9; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, i.e. χρόνῷ, in the meantime, meanwhile, Jn. 4:31; in NT ὁ μεταξύ, following, succeeding, Acts 13:42

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μεταξύ μετά, ξύν adv.,

of Place, betwixt, between, Il., etc.; with the Art., τὸ μεταξύ Hdt.; ἐν τῷ μ. Thuc.

of Time, between-whiles, meanwhile, Hdt., etc; with pres. part., μεταξὺ ὀρύσσων in the midst of his digging, Lat. inter fodiendum, id. Hdt.; μ. θύων Ar.; λέγοντα μ. in the middle of his discourse, Plat.

after, afterwards, NTest.

of Qualities, τὰ μ. intermediate, i. e. neither good nor bad, Plat.

as prep. with gen. between, Hdt., etc.

of Time, ὁ μ. τῆς δίκης τε καὶ τοῦ θανάτου [χρόνος] Plat.; τὰ μ. τούτου meanwhile, Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%between
between78% · 7×next11% · 1×meantime11% · 1×

9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνεἰς
αὐτός
ἐλέγχωI rebuke, expose
φονεύωI murder
ὅς
ἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose, am
Article the
οὗτος
πᾶςall, the whole,
μεταξύbetween
what comes after →
Article the
ναόςa temple, shrineθυσιαστήριονan altar
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,τέDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,
ἐρωτάωI ask, question, req
αὐτός
δύο
στρατιώτηςa soldier

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμεταξύ · 9× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Romans
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 35c. AD 40

ἐπεὶ δὲ φῶς μὲν ἐγένετο, σκότος δ’ ὑπεξέστη καὶ ἀνεχώρησεν, ὅροι δ’ ἐν τοῖς μεταξὺ διαστήμασιν ἐπάγησαν ἑσπέρα καὶ πρωΐα, κατὰ τἀναγκαῖον τοῦ χρόνου μέτρον ἀπετελεῖτο εὐθύς, ὃ καὶ ἡμέραν ὁ ποιῶν ἐκάλεσε, καὶ ἡμέραν οὐχὶ πρώτην, ἀλλὰ μίαν, ἣ λέλεκται…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.169c. AD 75–95

ἄπιστον μὲν οὐδὲν ἐδόκει τῶν ἠγγελμένων λογιζόμενος τοῦ θεοῦ τὴν μεγαλουργίαν καὶ τὴν πρὸς αὐτὸν εὔνοιαν, εἰ καὶ τῷ μεταξὺ χρόνῳ διέλιπεν, ὥρμητο δʼ εὐθὺς πρὸς τὸν Ἰώσηπον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 13.5c. AD 100

εἶδεν δὲ Ἰακὼβ τύπον τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ λαοῦ τοῦ μεταξύ: καὶ τί λέγει;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Lond. 2 p. 167-169 no. 177Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 40

ἕτερα τῇ μητρὶ ἡμῶν Ταοννώφρι ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς ζωῆς αὐτῆς χρόνον. ἐν δὲ τῷ μεταξὺ καὶ τῆς μητρὸς ἡμῶν τελευτησάσης καὶ ἡμῶν ὀφειλόντων παραλαβεῖν τὰ ταύτης ὑπάρχοντα ἀκολούθως τῇ

P.Hamb. 1 31 aArsinoites (?)AD 126–AD 138

εἶχον, ὅτε αὐτοῖς ἡ πολιτεία ἐδόθη, ἢ εἴ τινες ἄγαμοι εἶεν, πρὸς ἃς ἐὰν μεταξὺ ἀγάγωσι, τοῦ μέχρι μιᾶς ἕκαστος, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἕτεροι οὐετρανοὶ ἐπιτυχόντες μόνοι τῆς Ῥωμαίων

P.Col. 10 266Arsinoites (?)AD 179–AD 181

τὸ πρᾶγμα παρειλκύσθαι … φε … ασαι … θῆναι ἐπεὶ οὖν ἐν τῷ μεταξὺ … καὶ αὐτὸν … … ντ

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
ἀλλήλωνallēlōn one another G240 Reciprocal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculine
100× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means one another, indicating mutual action or relationship. In Matthew 25:32 and John 13:22, it describes how people interact with each other.
Tyndale gloss
one another
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀλλήλων is a reciprocal pronoun meaning 'one another' or 'each other,' derived from ἄλλος. It is used in various contexts to indicate mutual actions or relationships, appearing frequently in the New Testament, including verses like Matthew 25:32 and John 13:22. The lexicons agree on its meaning and usage without significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀλλήλων (gen. pl.), dat. -οις, -αις, acc. -ους, -ας, -α (no nom.), recipr. pron.

(< ἄλλος),

of one another, mutually: Mt 25:32, Mk 4:41, Jo 13:22, al.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀλλήλων, gen. plur. [no nom. being possible]; dat. τοις; -als, τοῖς ; ACC. -OUS, -as, -a, ONE another ; reciprocally, mutually: Mt. xxiv. 10; Jn. xiii. 35; Acts xxviii. 25; Ro. i. 12; Jas. v. 16; Rey. vi. 4, and often. [Fr. Hom. down. ]

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀλλήλων (allēlōn) — one another.

ἀλλήλων,

Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect ἀλλάλων, genitive plural, dua. ἀλλήλοιν, Epic dialect ἀλλήλοιϊν[Refs 8th c.BC+] feminine -αιν [Refs 5th c.BC+] codices: dative ἀλλήλοις, αις, οις, dual ἀλλήλοιν: accusative ἀλλήλους, ας, a, dual ἀλλήλω (feminine) [LXX+5th c.BC+]: the dual is rare in Prose: singular, κεράμὡ ἁρμόττοντι πρὸς ἄλληλον[Refs]:—of one another, to one another, one another; hence, mutually, reciprocally, used of all three persons, [Refs 8th c.BC+] among one another, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πρὸς ἀλλήλους, εἰς ἄλληλα, [Refs]; ἐπί, πρὸς ἀλλήλοις, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; παρ᾽ ἀλλήλους, -α, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ δι᾽ ἀλλήλων δεῖξις reciprocal proof, [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀλλήλων

allelon

Genitive plural from 243 reduplicated; one another:--each other,

mutual, one another, (the other), (them-, your-)selves, (selves)

together (sometimes with 3326 or 4314).

see GREEK for 243

see GREEK for 3326

see GREEK for 4314

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀλλήλων

Recip.pr.

one another

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀλλήλων allēlōn 100x

one another, each other

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀλλήλων redupl. from ἄλλος of one another, to one another, one another, Hom., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
C-GPM — Reciprocal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

C-GPM Part of Speech: reCiprocal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%one another
one another93% · 94×each other4% · 4×other renderings3% · 3×

101 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object46%adverbial46%indirect object5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 100 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
πρός
λέγωI say, speakδιαλογίζομαιI reason, debateλαλέωI speak, say
εἰς
αὐτόςβλέπωI look, seeφιλαδελφίαbrotherly love
ἀγαπάωI love
ἵναin order that, sσύArticle the
μετά
ἡμέραa dayγογγύζωI whisper, murmuλέγωI say, speak
ἀσπάζομαιI greet, salute, pay
πᾶςall, the whole,
ἀλλήλωνone another100×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸουδαῖοςJewishμαθητήςa learner, disciτέDisj
ἐν
φίλημαa kissArticle theἅγιοςset apart, holy,
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰςἐμβαίνωI embarkχαρίζομαιI show favor to,
τίςIrg
ἆραIrgἄνDisjεἰμίI am, exist
ὅτιthat, since, because
ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fλέγωI say, speakArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀλλήλων · 100× in the New Testament
John Romans Luke Acts Galatians 1 John 1 Thessalonians Mark 1 Corinthians 1 Peter Ephesians James
Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 20 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

μετὰ δὲ τὴν τοῦ νοητοῦ φωτὸς ἀνάλαμψιν, ὃ πρὸ ἡλίου γέγονεν, ὑπεχώρει τὸ ἀντίπαλον σκότος, διατειχίζοντος ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων αὐτὰ καὶ διιστάντος θεοῦ τοῦ τὰς ἐναντιότητας εὖ εἰδότος καὶ τὴν ἐκ φύσεως αὐτῶν διαμάχην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 2.5c. AD 96

εἰλικρινεῖς καὶ ἀκέραιοι ἦτε καὶ ἀμνησίκακοι εἰς ἀλλήλους.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Athen.. 23Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 82

Ἡρακλῆς ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι οὐλὴ ἀντικνημίῳ ἀριστερῷ, οἱ τρεῖς Ἡρακλέους νεωτέρου Πέρσαι τῆς ἐπιγονῆς, ἀλλήλων ἔγγυοι εἰς ἔκτισιν, Θέωνι τῶι καὶ Σωκράτῃ Ἥρωνος ὡς ἐτῶν τριάκοντα ἑνὸς ἀσήμωι, ἔχειν

P.Alex. 7Dionysias (Arsinoites)AD 113

οὐλὴ γόνατι ἀριστερῷ καὶ … Δημητροῦτι Ἀγχορίμφιος Περσίνῃ ὡς ἐτῶν τεσσαράκοντα … τοῖς δυσὶ ἀλλήλων ἐνγύοις μετὰ κυρίου τῆς Δημητροῦτος … … ειδωνος ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι πέντε οὐλὴ χειρὶ

P. Lond. 3 p. 144-148 no. 1179ArsinoitesAD 138–AD 161

καθήκει· ἐὰν δὲ διαφορὰς αὐτοῖς γενα … διὰ χειρὸς χρῆσιν ἔντοκον ἀργυρίου χ ἀπʼ ἀλλήλων ἀπόδοσις αὐτὴ … ηφεπ … η καὶ δραχμὰς … … … ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
τῶνho the G3588 Article · genitive · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GPM — Article · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
λογισμῶνlogismos thoughts G3053 Noun · genitive · plural · masculine
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A thought or reasoning is a computation or a mental process. In Romans 2:15, it refers to the conscience, and in 2 Corinthians 10:5, it's about bringing thoughts under control. This term is about thinking and reasoning.
Amplified meaning
reasoning, mental processes
Tyndale gloss
thought
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λογισμός is derived from λογίζομαι and encompasses meanings related to reasoning, thought, and computation. It appears in various contexts, including moral reasoning in Romans 2:15 and arguments in 2 Corinthians 10:5. The term can refer to both a mental process and a more formal calculation. Some sources note its use in a negative sense, indicating hostile reasoning against faith.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λογισμός, -οῦ, ὁ

(< λογίζομαι),

[in LXX: Ps 32 (33):10, 11, Pr 19:21, Is 66:18, al. (מַחֲשֶׁבֶת);]

a reasoning, thought: Ro 2:15, II Co 10:5.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λογισμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (λογίζομαι); 1. α γεσζογῖη, computation. 2. a reasoning: such as is hostile to the Christian faith, 2 Co. x. 4 (5) [A. V. imaginations }. 3. a judgment, decision: such as conscience passes, Ro. ii. 15 [A. V. thoughts]. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept. for awn, as Prov. vi. 18; Jer. xi. 19; Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 10.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λογισμός in its primary sense of ‘‘reckoning, computation ” is seen in BGU IV. 1074! (A.p. 275) in connexion with the payment of a ἰαχ- -ἀποδεδωκότα κατὰ τὸν λογισμὸν τὸν βασιλικὸν ἐντάγιον πᾶν . .. : cf. P Oxy VI. 9404 (v/a.D.) καταξίωσον ἐπέχειν τοῦ λογισμοῦ, ‘please to delay the account-taking ’’ (Edd.). For a more general sense see Michel 976® (B.C. 300) καλῶς Kal δικαίως ἐπεμ[εἸλήθη τῶν κοινῶν πάντων Kal τοὺς λογισμοὺς ἀπέδωκεν ὀρθ[ῶ]ς Kal δικαίως, and as showing how the meaning ‘‘ thought,” ‘‘yeasoning,” led to ‘‘ judgment, decision,” as in Rom 2!8 2 Cor τοῦ cf. P Oxy XII. 150318 (a.D. 288-9) ἕτοιμος λογισμοὺς tapéxet[v—reports in connexion with a trial, and OGTS τοῦ (B.c. 311) ἀν[θ]ρωπίνωι λογισμῶι, ‘human calculation.”” See also 7852. x22. patr. Gad vi. 2 τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ μίσους ἐσκότιζέ μου τὸν νοῦν, kal ἐτάρασσέ μου τὸν λογισμὸν πρὸς τὸ ἀνελεῖν αὐτόν. The word is used in a bad…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λογισμός (logismos) — thought.

λογ-ισμός, ὁ,

counting, calculation, τῶν ἡμερῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in plural, numbers, arithmetic, λογισμοὺς μανθάνειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. account, reckoning, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λ. λαμβάνειν hold an audit, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. without reference to number, calculation, reasoning, τοῦ ξυμφέροντος λογισμῷ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λ. αὐτοκράτορι (see. αὐτοκράτωρ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; personified, opposed to Θυμός, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.2. reason, argument, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

III. reasoning power, [[Refs 5th c.BC+] —Only in Prose and Comedy texts

Strong's Greek Dictionary

λογισμός

logismos

from 3049; computation, i.e. (figuratively) reasoning (conscience,

conceit):--imagination, thought.

see GREEK for 3049

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λογισμός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

reasoning, thinking

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λογισμός logismos 2x

pr. a computation, act of computing; a thought, cogitation, Rom. 2:15; a conception, device, 2 Cor. 10:4*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λογισμός λογισμός, οῦ, ὁ, λογίζομαι a counting, reckoning, calculation, computation, Thuc., Plat.:—in pl. arithmetic, Xen., Plat.

an account, bill, Dem.

without reference to number, calculation, consideration, reasoning, Thuc., Dem.

an argument, conclusion, Xen.

reasoning power, reason, id. Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPM — Noun · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%thoughts
thoughts100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀλλήλων
ὀχύρωμαa fortress, strong d
καθαίρεσιςtaking down, des
λογισμόςthoughts
what comes after →
κατηγορέωI accuse, charge, pr
Disj
καθαιρέωI take down, depose,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλογισμός · 2× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians Romans
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 18 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 24c. AD 40

οὐδὲ γὰρ ἡ νοητὴ πόλις ἕτερόν τί ἐστιν ἢ ὁ τοῦ ἀρχιτέκτονος λογισμὸς ἤδη [νοητὴν]ν [[νοητὴν]ητὴν].

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.97c. AD 75–95

τοὺς δὲ σώφρονας καὶ μηδέτερον τῶν λεγομένων εἰς ἡδονὴν λαμβάνοντας ἰδίαν, καὶ τὸ θηρίοις περιπεσόντα ἀποθανεῖν ἀνθρώπινον ἡγουμένους καὶ τὸ ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ πρὸς αὐτὸν μεταστῆναι διὰ τὴν προσοῦσαν ἀρετὴν εἰκὸς νομίζοντας, πρᾴως ἔχειν οὗτος ὁ λογισμὸς…

PolycarpPolycarp to the Philippians 4.3c. AD 110

τὰς χήρας σωφρονούσας περὶ τὴν τοῦ κυρίου πίστιν, ἐντυγχανούσας ἀδιαλείπτως περὶ πάντων, μακρὰν οὔσας πάσης διαβολῆς, καταλαλιᾶς, ψευδομαρτυρίας, φιλαργυρίας καὶ παντὸς κακοῦ, γινωσκούσας ὅτι εἰσὶ θυσιαστήριον θεοῦ καὶ ὅτι πάντα μωμοσκοπεῖται, καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD undated
P.Giss. 1 40Apollonopolites HeptakomiasAD 215

Αὐρήλιος Σεουῆρος Ἀντωνῖνος Εὐσεβὴς λέγει· … η μᾶλλον αν … τὰς αἰτίας καὶ τοὺς λογισμοὺς … θεοῖς τοῖς ἀθανάτοις εὐχαριστήσαιμι, ὅτι τῆς τοιαύτης … ησμε συνετήρησαν. τοιγαροῦν νομίζω οὕτω

P.Stras. 6 574AD 201–AD 250

τους. βούλομαι τοὺς … … ι τὴν Νεικίου παρ … … τομένους τοὺς λογισμοὺς … … λημμάτων ὅσα εἰς α … … ων … … … των η

Stud.Pal. 5 6HermopolisAD 266–AD 268

αγμα καὶ διωρίσθη ἃ χρὴ φοιτᾶν παρʼ ἑκάστης … ττωμενοι καθʼ ἕκαστον τῶν λογισμῶν δηλός ἐστιν ἀριθμὸς καὶ λειτουργιῶν … οι· εἰ μὲν δὴ χορηγία τις ἦν πλοίων

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
κατηγορούντωνkatēgoreō accusing G2723 Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · plural · masculine
23× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To accuse someone of doing something wrong, like in Romans 2:15 where people accuse themselves or in John 5:45 where Jesus is accused by Moses.
Amplified meaning
condemning, blaming
Tyndale gloss
to accuse
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κατηγορέω is a verb meaning to accuse or make an accusation, often in a judicial context. It is derived from κατά (against) and ἀγορεύω (to speak). The New Testament uses it in various forms, including in Matthew 12:10 and Acts 24:2, where it refers to bringing charges against someone. There is some variation in how the lexicons describe its grammatical constructions, particularly regarding the cases used with the verb.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατηγορέω, -ῶ

(< κατά, ἀγορεύω),

[in LXX: Da LXX 6:5(6), I Mac 7:6, 25, II Mac 4:47 10:13, 21, IV Mac 9:14*;]

to make accusation, accuse,

in general: absol., Ro 2:15; c. gen. pers. (cl., WM, 254), Jo 5:45; irreg. c. acc. pers., Re 12:10;

before a judge: absol., Ac 24:2, 19; c. gen. pers., Mt 12:10, Mk 3:2, Lk 6:7 11:54 (WH, txt., R, om.), 23:2, 10, Jo 8:[6], Ac 25:5 28:19; id. c. acc. rei (cl., but v. WM, 254), Mk 15:3, 4; c. gen. rei (Dem.),

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατηγορέω, -@; impf. κατηγόρουν ; fut. κατηγορήσω; 1 aor. κατηγόρησα ; pres. pass. κατηγοροῦμαι ; (κατά and ἀγορεύω, prop. to speak against [cf. κατά, III. 7] in court, in the assembly of the people), to accuse ; a. before a judge: absol. [to make accusation], Acts xxiv. 2, 19; τινός, to accuse one, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. iii. 2; Lk. vi. 7 T Trtxt. WI; xi.54 RL Trbr.; xxiii. 2,10; Jn. viii. 6; Acts xxv. 5; xxviii. 19; with the addition of a gen. of the thing of which 9ne is accused (as Dem. 515 fin.): Acts xxiv. 8; xxv. 11, (unless it be thought preferable to regard the relative in these instances as in the gen. by attraction [so B. § 132, 16 fin.], since the com. constr. in Grk. authors is κατήγ. ti τινος, cf. Matthiae § 370 Anm. 2 p. 849 sq., and § 378 p. 859; ef. W. § 80, 9 a.); τινὸς περί τινος, Acts xxiv. 13 (Thue. 8, 85; Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 2); w. gen. of pers. and ace. of the thing, Mk.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατηγορέω 9717 (A.D, 180-192) οὐ κατασχε[θ]ήσομαι τῇ [ὑ]ποσχέσει, “*T will not be bound by my promise " (Edd.), P Oxy ΠῚ. 532° (ii/A.D.) ὑπὸ κακοῦ συνειδότος κατεχόμενος, ‘being oppressed by an evil conscience’’ (Edd.), P Ryl IT. 11738 (A.D. 269) μὴ κατέχεσθαι τοῖς ἐκείνων ὀφε[ιλήμασι]ν, “ not be held responsible for their debts” (Edd.), and PSI IV. 299% (iii/A.D.) κατεσχέθην νόσῳ, “1 was held fast by disease” (cf. [Jn] 54). In A/zchel 13251 (iv-ii/B.c.) the verb is used of binding by a curse—Maviv καταδῶ καὶ κατέχω. (4) The verb is also = “"" lay hands on,” ‘‘ impress” for some public duty, as in P Giss I. 119 (A.p. 118) κατεσχέτί = 0)nv ὑπὸ τοῦ ἐπιτρόπου ὥστε εἱερατεύειν τοῦ χειρεισμοῦ τῶν κυβερνητ(ῶν), and P Lond 342? (a.p. 185) (=II. p. 174) where a charge is laid against one Sempronius of attempting to lay hands on the relatives of the petitioner as boatoverseers—mpopaor τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατηγορέω (katēgoreō) — to accuse.

κατηγορ-έω,

speak against, especially before judges, accuse, opposed to ἀπολογέομαι, with genitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τινὸς πρὸς τὴν πόλιν denounce him publicly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατηγόρεις [αὐτῶν] ὡς λέγοιεν you accused them of saying, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τινὸς ὅτι[Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. κ. τί τινος bring as a charge against a person, accuse him of it, δείν᾽ ἔπη μου [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with infinitive, κ. τινὸς παθεῖν τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. with accusative of things only, allege in accusation, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, to be brought as an accusation against, κατηγορεῖτο τοὐπίκλημα τοῦτό μο; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ πρῶτά μου ψευδῆ -ημένα the first false charges brought against me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, σφέων..…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατηγορέω

kategoreo

from 2725; to be a plaintiff, i.e. to charge with some

offence:--accuse, object.

see GREEK for 2725

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατηγορέω

v.

I accuse, charge, prosecute

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατηγορέω katēgoreō 23x

to speak against, accuse, Mt. 12:10; 27:12; Jn. 5:45

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κατηγορέω ἀγορεύω to speak against, to accuse, τινός Hdt.; κατά τινος Xen.

κ. τί τινος, to state or bring as a charge against a person, accuse him of it, Hdt., Soph., etc.

c. acc. rei only, to allege in accusation, allege, Lat. objicere, Eur., Xen., etc.:—Pass. to be brought as an accusation against, Soph., Thuc., etc.:—impers., c. inf., σφέων κατηγόρητο μηδίζειν a charge had been brought against them that they favoured the Medes, Hdt.; so, κατηγορεῖταί τινος ὡς βαρβαρίζει Xen.

absol. to be an accuser, appear as prosecutor, Ar., Plat.

to signify, indicate, prove, Lat. arguo, c. acc. rei, τι Xen.:c. gen. to tell of, Aesch.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-GPM — Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-GPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%accuse
accuse25% · 6×accusing25% · 6×they may accuse13% · 3×he is accused4% · 1×they accuse4% · 1×make accusation4% · 1×they should accuse4% · 1×being accused4% · 1×other renderings17% · 4×

24 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb96%object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 23 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνεἰμίI am, existDisj
ἵναin order that, so th
θεραπεύωI care for, atteαὐτός
καίand, even, also, nam
πάρειμιI am present, am
ἐγώ
ὅτιthat, since, becὅς
σύ
πόσος
κατηγορέωaccusing23×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theὑπόλέγωI say, speak
κατά
αὐτόςπρόσωπονthe face, counte
σύ
πρόςΜωϋσῆςMoses
ἐγώ
οὐδείςno one, none, no
ὑπό
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατηγορέω · 23× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Mark Matthew Revelation Romans
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.67c. AD 40

7), ᾧ τὴν Αἰθιόπισσαν, τὴν ἀμετάβλητον καὶ κατακορῆ γνώμην, αὐτὸς ὁ θεὸς ἡρμόσατο, τολμᾷ καταλαλεῖν Μωυσῆ καὶ κατηγορεῖν, ἐφ’ ᾧ ὤφειλεν ἐπαινεῖσθαι (ibid.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.314c. AD 75–95

Λάβανος δὲ τοιαύτης αὐτῷ προρρήσεως γεγενημένης μεθʼ ἡμέραν τὸν Ἰάκωβον εἰς λόγους προκαλεσάμενος καὶ δηλώσας αὐτῷ τὸ ὄναρ, ἐπεὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν ἦλθε πεισθείς, ἤρξατο κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ προφέρων, ὅτι καὶ πένητα αὐτὸν ἐλθόντα πρὸς αὐτὸν καὶ πάντων ἄπορον…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 5th c. AD
P.Phil. 4ArsinoitesAD 141

αὐτοῦ καὶ Σεραπίωνος ἐπικαλουμένου Δείου τούς τε ὄντας κατηγόρους καὶ εἴ τινες ἄλλοι βούλονται κατηγορεῖν, πέμψον παραχρῆμα εἰς ἐμέ. ἐρρῶσθαί σε θέλω. ἔτους κβ Ἀθὺρ ιγ. πρὸς ἃς ἀντέγραψα·

ου οὔτε ἐγγ … … μενούσης μου ἀπολογεῖσθαι … … … αγείνεται ὁ κατηγορῶν, ὁ δ’ οἰνο … … ἄπρατος γενέσθαι, αὐτὴ κατ … … ενη ἔτι καὶ

Γάλβα Αὐτοκράτορος Σεβαστοῦ Μεχεὶρ δ. ἀπὸ εἰσδόσεως ἀναγινωσκομεν … ξεννον δύο και … λαου κατηγόρων διʼ ἧς προσήγγειλαν τοὺς Πτολεμαιέων βουλευτὰς … … προτεταγμένην … νεωκορίαν πεπρακέναι ταλάντων δ.

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
ē or G2228 Particle
343× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Or is a word used to show a choice between two things, like in Matthew 5:17 where it's either obey God's law or not. It's also used to compare things, like in Romans 1:21 where it's one thing or another.
Tyndale gloss
or
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word (ē) is a particle used to indicate distinction, functioning as a disjunctive 'or' and a comparative 'than.' It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in phrases like 'either...or' and in disjunctive questions. Notably, it can also express comparisons after comparative terms, such as in Matthew 10:15. The entries do not show any significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11);

disjunctive, or;

between single words: Mt 5:17, Mk 6:56, Lk 2:24, Jo 6:19, Ro 1:21, al.;

before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, freq. in interrog. form: Mt 7:4, 9, Mk 12:14, Lk 13:4, Ro 3:29 6:3 9:21, I Co 6:9, 16 9:6, II Co 11:7; ἢ . . . ἤ…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Χριστοῦ (NVWT ΒΗ Targ. Jonath. ad ᾿ς lili. 10), the kingdom of the Messiah, which will be founded by God through the Messiah and over which the Messiah will preside as God’s vicegerent; ἡ Bac. τῶν οὐρανῶν, only in Matthew, but very frequently [some 33 times], the kingdom of heaven, i. e. the kingdom which is of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin. writ. nown mao is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed universally, not the Messianic kingdom); sometimes simply ἡ βασιλεία : Mt. iv. 23, ete.; Jas. ii. 5; once ἡ Bac. τοῦ Δαυείδ, because it was supposed the Messiah would be one of David’s descendants and a king very like David, Mk. xi. 10; once also ἡ Bac. τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ θεοῦ, Eph. ν. 5. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel — who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one another and the last of…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἢ μή. The general distinction between οὐ and μή is that οὐ is objective, dealing only with facts, while μή is sudjectize, involving will and thought. But in late Greek μή has encroached very largely upon οὐ, with the result that in the NT οὐ is almost entirely confined to the indicative, while μή monopolizes the other moods (but see I. 5). A few exx. of some of the many uses of μή will make this clear. I. Μή negatives (1) the conjunctive (a) after ἐάν (4v)—P Oxy II. 294%? (A.D. 22) (= Selections, p. 36), where certain men are confined to prison, ἐὰν μή τι πίσωσι τὸν ἀρχιστάτορα δο[ῦν]αι etk(= ἱκ)ανόν, ‘* unless indeed they shall persuade the chief usher to give security,’’ BGU II. 5301” \i/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 61) alav (/. ἐὰν) μὴ ἔλθῃς, κινδυνεύω ἐκστῆvat od ἔχω [κλή]ρου, “if you do not come I run the risk of losing the lot (of land) which I possess ”—a father writes to Selections…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἤ (ē) — or.

ἤ,

Epic dialect also ἠέ (in signification [Refs 4th c.BC+], conjunction with two chief senses, Disj. (or) and comparative (than).

__A DISJUNCTIVE, or, ἐγὼ.. ἢ ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θεόσυτος ἢ βρότειος ἢ κεκραμένη [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.2 ἢ.. ἤ either.. or, ἢ νῦν δηθύνοντ᾽ ἢ ὕστερον αὖτις ἰόντα [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.; so ἢ.. ἤτοι.. [Refs 5th c.BC+] is emphasized, later no distinction is implied, [NT+2nd c.BC+]; ἤ repeated any number of times, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι ἢ τεὸν ἢ Αἴαντος ἰὼν γέρας ἢ Ὀδυσῆος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἤ is probably wrongly accented in codices of [Refs 8th c.BC+] adverb [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

e

a primary particle of distinction between two connected terms;

disjunctive, or; comparative, than:--and, but (either), (n-)either,

except it be, (n-)or (else), rather, save, than, that, what, yea.

Often used in connection with other particles. Compare especially

2235, 2260, 2273.

see GREEK for 2235

see GREEK for 2260

see GREEK for 2273

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Disj.prt.

or, than

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἤ ē 343x

can function as a conj (298x), either, or, Mt. 6:24; after comparatives, and ἄλλος, ἕτερος, expressed or implied, than, Mt. 10:15; 18:8; Acts 17:21; 24:21; intensive after ἀλλά and πρίν, Lk. 12:51; Mt. 1:18; it also serves to point an interrogation, Rom. 3:29

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle — Particle
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT PaRTicle, disjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

or: The word is used once for either (1Sa 26:10), and is still in poetic use in this sense; as in, "Without or wave or wind" (Coleridge); "Or the bakke or some bone he breketh in his dzouthe" (Piers Plowman (B), VII, 93; compare Merchant of Venice, III, ii, 65). It is also used with "ever" for before (Ps 90:2; Ecclesiasticus 18:19), which the American Standard Revised Version substitutes in Ec 12:6 (compare 12:1,2); So 6:12; Da 6:24.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
84%or
or84% · 304×than13% · 47×other renderings4% · 13×

364 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial20%object18%subject12%predicate7%verb4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 343 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
σύ
πρόςχείρa handἁμαρτίαa sin
πατήρfather, Father, ance
Article theκακολογέωI speak evil of,Disj
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἀνεκτόςendurable, tolerθεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenβοῦςan ox
ἀδελφόςa brother
DisjArticle theἐάνCond
or343×
what comes after →
Article the
μήτηρa motherπόλιςa cityδύο
τίςIrg
πίνωI drink, imbibeεἰμίI am, existλαλέωI speak, say
οὐNeg
οἶδαI know, rememberἀναγινώσκωI readδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐν
φυλακήa watching, guarτίςIrgποῖοςIrg
καίand, even, also, nam
ἰχθύςa fishαἰτέωI ask, request, πρός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 343× in the New Testament
Matthew 1 Corinthians Luke Acts Mark Romans 2 Corinthians John 1 Peter Galatians James Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 457 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
καὶkai also G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Romans than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ol'-so: In the Greek kai, when it is equivalent to "also" or "even," is always placed before the word or phrase which it is intended to emphasize (e.g. Ac 12:3; 1 Joh 4:21). Mt 6:14 should therefore read, "Your heavenly Father will forgive you also"; Lu 6:13, "Whom also he named apostles"; Heb 8:6, "The mediator of a better covenant also"; and 1Th 4:14, `If we believe that Jesus died and rose again, so also (we believe that) those who are fallen asleep in Jesus, God will bring with Him.'

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίalso8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

who show the work of the law written in the hearts when they are bearing witness to them their conscience and between one another the thoughts accusing or also presenting a defense
ἀπολογουμένων,apologeomai presenting a defense G626 Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · genitive · plural · masculine
10× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means to defend oneself or give an account of one's actions, and is used in the Bible to describe speaking in one's own defense, such as in Luke 21:14 and Acts 26:1.
Amplified meaning
justifying, excusing, themselves, one another
Tyndale gloss
to defend oneself
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἀπολογέομαι is built from ἀπό (from) and λόγος (word). It means to defend oneself or to make a defense, often in a legal context. The New Testament uses it in passages like Luke 21:14 and Acts 26:1, where individuals are called to articulate their defense. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπολογέομαι, -οῦμαι

(< ἀπό, λόγος),

[in LXX: Je 12:1 (ויב) 38 (31):6, II Mac 13:26*;]

to defend: c. acc., Ro 2:15.

to defend one's self: absol., Lk 21:14, Ac 26:1; seq. ὅτι, Ac 25:8; τί, to adduce something in one's defence, Lk 12:11, Ac 26:24 (ταῦτα) 24:10 (τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ); περί, c. gen. rei, and ἐπί, c. gen. pers., Ac 26:2; c. dat. pers., Ac 19:33, II Co 12:19.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπολογέομαι, -οὔμαι ; impf. ἀπελογούμην (Acts xxvi. 1); 1 aor. ἀπελογησάμην; 1 aor. pass. inf. ἀπολογηθῆναι, in a reflex. sense (Lk. xxi. 14) ; a depon. mid. verb (fr. λόγος), prop. to speak so as to absolve (amd) one’s self, talk one’s self off of a charge ete. ; 1. to defend one’s self, make one’s defence: absol., Lk. xxi. 14; Acts xxvi. 1; foll. by ὅτι, Acts xxv. 8; τί, to bring forward something in defence of one’s self, Lk. xii. 11; Acts xxvi. 24, (often so in Grk. writ. also) ; τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπ. either I bring forward what contributes to my defence [Ὁ], or I plead my own cause [R. V. make my defence], Acts xxiv. 10; περί with | gen. of the thing and ἐπί with gen. of pers., concerning a thing before one’s tribunal, Acts xxvi. 2; with dat. of the person whom by my defence I strive to convince that Iam innocent or upright, to defend or justify myself in one’s eyes [A. V. unto]…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπολογέομαι. A good example of this judicial verb is afforded by P Par 3534 ff (a petition to King Ptolemy Philometor, B.C. 163) ἐάν σοι φαίνηται, συντάξαι καταστῆσαι ἐπί σε ὑπὲρ μὲν [ἐμοῦ ἀπολογιούμενον Δημήτριον ‘‘to make my defence” : cf. P Strass I. 51° (A.D. 262) ἀπολ]ογησομένους πρὸς τὰ [a Jel α[ἰ]ρόμενα αὑτοῖς and OG/S 609% (A.D. 231) μή τις ὡς ἀγνοήσας ἀπολογήσηται. Vettius Valens p. 2091 βασιλεῖ ἀπολογήσεται, καὶ ἐὰν μὴ ὑπὲρ ἑαυτοῦ, ὑπὲρ ἑτέρου δέ (cf. p. 2697°). Cf. fora cognate verb P Petr III. 53 (7)8 (iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski?, p. 45) πρὸς αἰτίαν, ὑπὲρ ἧς ἀπ]ολογίζεται, ‘to meet a charge against him, and make his defence” (Edd.), OGTIS 315% (B.C. 164-3) καὶ αὐτὸς ὑπὲρ ὧν ἔφησεν ἔχειν τὰς ἐντολὰς διὰ πλειόνων ἀπελογίσατο, P Leid A* (Ptol) ἀπολογίσωμαι (needlessly corrected to -ἥσωμαι by Leemans), α΄. See Hatzidakis #zz/. p. 395, ‘‘sagte man auch im Alterthum sowohl ἀπολογέομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπολογέομαι (apologeomai) — to defend oneself.

ἀπολογ-έομαι,

aorist ἀπελογησάμην[Refs 5th c.BC+]; also aorist passive ἀπελογήθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἀπολελόγημαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—speak in defence, defend oneself, opposed to κατηγορεῖν, περί τινος about a thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πρὸς τὴν μαρτυρίαν in reference or answer to the evidence, [Refs 5th c.BC+]before.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. ὑπέρ τινος speak in another's behalf, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. ὑπέρ τινος speak in support of a fact, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πρὸς Μέλητον in answer to him, [Refs 5th c.BC+]the defendant, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. with accusative of things, defend oneself against, ἀ. τὰς διαβολάς[Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πράξεις defend what one has done, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπολογέομαι

apologeomai

middle voice from a compound of 575 and 3056; to give an account

(legal plea) of oneself, i.e. exculpate (self):--answer (for self),

make defence, excuse (self), speak for self.

see GREEK for 575

see GREEK for 3056

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπολογέομαι

v.

I give a defense, defend myself

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπολογέομαι apologeomai 10x

to defend one’s self against a charge, to make a defence, Lk. 12:11; 21:14

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπολογέομαι ἀπό, λόγος to speak in defence, defend oneself, περί τινος about a thing, πρός τι or τινα in answer to.., Thuc., Plat.; ἀπ. ὑπέρ τινος to speak in another's behalf, Hdt.:—absol., id. Plat.; ὁ ἀπολογούμενος the defendant, Ar.

c. acc. criminis, to defend oneself against a thing, explain, excuse, Thuc., Aeschin.

ἀπ. τι ἔς τι to allege in one's defence against a charge, Thuc., Plat.

ἀπ. δίκην θανάτου to speak against sentence of death being passed on one, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNP-GPM — Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNP-GPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ (An argument made before a court)

→ Of Jeremiah Jer 26:12-16

→ Of Peter Ac 4:8-13; 5:23-29

→ Of Stephen Ac 7

→ Of Paul Ac 22; 23:1-6; 24:10-21; 26:1-23

→ Military defenses

See FORT

→ See ARMIES

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%presenting a defense
presenting a defense40% · 4×present a defense30% · 3×i present a defense10% · 1×we are presenting a defense10% · 1×you may present a defense10% · 1×

10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb90%object10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
τίςIrg
Disj
προμελετάωI meditate beforehan
μήNeg
θέλωI will, wish, desire
χείρa hand
ἐμαυτοῦ
περί
ΠαῦλοςPaul
Article the
ἀπολογέομαιpresenting a defense10×
what comes after →
Article the
δῆμοςthe people, multΦῆστοςFestus
Disj
τίςIrg
ὅτιthat, since, because
οὔτεNeg
κατέναντιopposite, in front o
θεόςGod, a god

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπολογέομαι · 10× in the New Testament
Acts Luke 2 Corinthians Romans
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAgainst Flaccus 106c. AD 40

τότε γὰρ κοινοὺς παρέχοντες ἑαυτοὺς δικαστάς, ἐξ ἴσου καὶ τῶν κατηγόρων καὶ τῶν ἀπολογουμένων ἀκροώμενοι, μηδενὸς ἀκρίτου προκαταγινώσκειν ἀξιοῦντες, ἐβράβευον οὔτε πρὸς ἔχθραν οὔτε πρὸς χάριν, ἀλλὰ πρὸς τὴν φύσιν τῆς ἀληθείας τὰ δόξαντα εἶναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.317c. AD 75–95

ταῦτα εἰπόντος Λαβάνου Ἰάκωβος ἀπελογεῖτο μὴ μόνῳ πατρίδος ἔρωτα τὸν θεόν, ἀλλὰ καὶ πᾶσιν ἐμφῦσαι, καὶ μετὰ τοσοῦτον χρόνον καλῶς ἔχειν αὐτὸν κατελθεῖν εἰς ταύτην.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Petr. 3 21 g (second copy)Krokodilopolis (Arsinoites)227 BC

Ἀθηναίου τῆς ἐπιγονῆς καὶ ἅμα τε γραπτὸν λόγον θεμένης καὶ τὰ δικαιώματα βουλομένης τε ἀπολογεῖσθαι τὴν δίκην ἐπειδὴ καὶ τὸ διάγραμμα ὃ καὶ παρέδοτο ἐν τοῖς δικαιώμασιν ἡ Ἡράκλεια

ου οὔτε ἐγγ … … μενούσης μου ἀπολογεῖσθαι … … … αγείνεται ὁ κατηγορῶν, ὁ δ’ οἰνο … … ἄπρατος γενέσθαι, αὐτὴ

PSI 7 827AD 301–AD 400

ζῶν ?. ἐὰν δὲ γράμματα αὐτοῦ ἐπιφέρῃς ἐναλλαγῆς ἢ ἄλλου τινὸς ἢ μεταβολῆς, πάντως ἀπολογούμεθα. καὶ νῦν οὖν μετάδος αὐτῷ αὐτὰ ταῦτα· περὶ γὰρ τούτου οὐδὲν δεδύνημαι πρᾶξαι ἐνθάδε,

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate